0% found this document useful (0 votes)
265 views132 pages

Manual 7VK512

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
265 views132 pages

Manual 7VK512

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 132

.UMERICAL !

UTO 2ECLOSURE 2ELAY


3INGLE 0OLE OR 4HREE 0OLE WITH 3YNCHRONISM AND 6OLTAGE #HECK /PTION
6+ 6
)NSTRUCTION -ANUAL /RDER .O # ' # 

&IGURE  )LLUSTRATION OF THE NUMERICAL AUTO RECLOSURE RELAY 6+ IN SURFACE MOUNTING CASE

D 3IEMENS !' 


6+ 6 #ONFORMITY

#ONFORMITY
4HIS PRODUCT IS IN CONFORMITY WITH THE DIRECTIVE OF THE #OUNCIL OF THE %UROPEAN #OMMUNITIES ON THE APPROXIMA
TION OF THE LAWS OF THE -EMBER 3TATES RELATING TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE
%%# AND CONCERNING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR APPLICATION WITHIN SPECIFIED VOLTAGE LIMITS ,OW VOLTAGE
DIRECTIVE  %%# 

#ONFORMITY IS PROVED BY TESTS THAT HAD BEEN PERFORMED ACCORDING TO ARTICLE  OF THE #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE IN ACCOR
DANCE WITH THE GENERIC STANDARDS %.   AND %.   FOR %-# DIRECTIVE AND THE STANDARDS %.
  FOR LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE BY 3IEMENS !'

4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED FOR APPLICATION IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT

4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS OF )%#  AND THE 'ERMAN STANDARDS
$).   PART  CORRESPONDING TO 6$%  PART  

 # ' #


6+ 6 #ONTENTS

#ONTENTS

 )NTRODUCTION                                                                        
 !PPLICATION                                                                           
 &EATURES                                                                             
 )MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS                                                                

 $ESIGN                                                                              
 !RRANGEMENTS                                                                        
 $IMENSIONS                                                                        
 /RDERING DATA                                                                       

 4ECHNICAL $ATA                                                                   
 'ENERAL DATA                                                                        
 )NPUTSOUTPUTS                                                                       
 %LECTRICAL TESTS                                                                       
 -ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS                                                               
 #LIMATIC STRESS TESTS                                                                  
 3ERVICE CONDITIONS                                                                   
 $ESIGN                                                                             
 !UTO RECLOSURE                                                                     
 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL                                             
 !NCILLARY FUNCTIONS                                                                  

 -ETHOD OF OPERATION                                                             
 /PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT                                                           
 !UTOMATIC RECLOSURE                                                                 
 'ENERAL                                                                             
 3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE                                                   
 !CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES                                                         
 )NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER                                          
 4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE                                                           
 3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE                                                          
 3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE                                                
 4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS FOR SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE                               
 -ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE                                                            
 #ONTROL OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY TWO PROTECTIVE RELAYS                              
 4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO AUTO RECLOSE DEVICES                                     
 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK                                                      
 'ENERAL                                                                             
 /PERATING MODES                                                                    
 $EAD LINE SWITCHING                                                                 
 3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM                                                             
 !SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING                                                              

# ' # 


6+ 6 #ONTENTS

 !NCILLARY FUNCTIONS                                                                  


 0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS                                                           
 )NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS SIGNAL RELAYS                                             
 )NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER                                
 )NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT                                                           
 $ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION FOR FAULT RECORDING MODELS WITH SYNCHRONISM CHECK          
 /PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND CONVERSION MODELS WITH SYNCHRONISM CHECK                 
 -ONITORING FUNCTIONS                                                                  
 (ARDWARE MONITORING                                                                 
 3OFTWARE MONITORING                                                                  

 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS                                                         
 5NPACKING AND REPACKING                                                           

 0REPARATIONS                                                                        
 -OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS                                                            
 -ODEL 6+J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING                                      
 -ODEL 6+J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR J%JJJ FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION          
 #HECKING THE RATED DATA                                                              
 #ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS                                                    
 #HECKING THE ,3! DATA TRANSMISSION LINK                                                
 #ONNECTIONS                                                                        
 #HECKING THE CONNECTIONS                                                             

 #ONFIGURATION OF OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS                                                


 /PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS                                                             
 3ETTINGS FOR OPERATING PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCK                                     

 #ONFIGURATION OF THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS                                                 


 )NTRODUCTION                                                                         
 0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS                                                    

 -ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS                        


 )NTRODUCTION                                                                         
 -ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS ADDRESS BLOCK                                       
 -ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK                                 
 -ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS ADDRESS BLOCK                                      
 -ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK                               

 #ONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION ADDRESS BLOCK        

 # ' #


6+ 6 #ONTENTS

 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS                                                          
 3AFETY PRECAUTIONS                                                                  

 $IALOG WITH THE RELAY                                                                


 -EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL                                                 
 /PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COMPUTER                                                    
 /PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS                                                             
 2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW                                                  

 3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS                                                    


 )NTRODUCTION                                                                         
 0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE                                                             
 3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS                                                             
 3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME                                                               
 )NITIAL DISPLAYS ADDRESS BLOCKS  AND                                               
 0OWER SYSTEM DATA ADDRESS BLOCK                                                  
 3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING ADDRESS BLOCK                                           
 3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS BLOCK                                          
 3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ADDRESS BLOCK                            

 !NNUNCIATIONS                                                                      
 )NTRODUCTION                                                                         
 /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK                                            
 &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK  TO                                             
 #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS ADDRESS BLOCK                                     
 2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS BLOCK                             

 /PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES                                                         


 !DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK ADDRESS BLOCK                         
 %RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS ADDRESS BLOCK                             
 /N/FF CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE                                             
 3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS ADDRESS BLOCK                                           
 2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET                                                
 #HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL                         
 #HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET VIA BINARY INPUTS                                

 4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING                                                          


 'ENERAL                                                                             
 4ESTING THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION                                                     
 4ESTING THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION                                     

 #OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS                                                 


 -EASURED VOLTAGE CHECKS                                                            
 #HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK                                    
 -EASURING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME                                              

 0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION                                                      

# ' # 


6+ 6 #ONTENTS

 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING                                                 


 2OUTINE CHECKS                                                                    
 2EPLACING THE CLOCK MODULE                                                        
 &AULT TRACING                                                                       
 2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE                                                             

 2EPAIRS                                                                          

 3TORAGE                                                                          

!PPENDIX                                                                           

! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS                                                                  


" #ONNECTION DIAGRAM                                                               
# 4ABLES                                                                             

./4%

4HIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL DOES NOT PURPORT TO COVER ALL 4HE CONTENTS OF THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL NOT BE
DETAILS IN EQUIPMENT NOR TO PROVIDE FOR EVERY POSSI COME PART NOR MODIFY ANY PRIOR OR EXISTING AGREE
BLE CONTINGENCY TO BE MET IN CONNECTION WITH INSTAL MENT COMMITMENT OR RELATIONSHIP 4HE SALES CON
LATION OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE TRACT CONTAINS THE ENTIRE OBLIGATIONS OF 3IEMENS 4HE
WARRANTY CONTAINED IN THE CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PAR
3HOULD FURTHER INFORMATION BE DESIRED OR SHOULD PAR TIES IS THE SOLE WARRANTY OF 3IEMENS !NY STATEMENTS
TICULAR PROBLEMS ARISE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED SUFFI CONTAINED HEREIN DO NOT CREATE NEW WARRANTIES NOR
CIENTLY FOR THE PURCHASER S PURPOSE THE MATTER MODIFY THE EXISTING WARRANTY
SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THE LOCAL 3IEMENS SALES OFFICE

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NTRODUCTION

 )NTRODUCTION

 !PPLICATION

4HE NUMERICAL AUTO RECLOSURE RELAY 6+ IS AN THE INDIVIDUAL BEAKER POLES CAN BE CONSIDERED BY
UNIVERSALLY APPLICABLE DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOS THE DEVICE "UT GENERALLY THE DEVICE CAN OPERATE
URE AS WELL AS CHECKING OF THE CLOSING CONDITIONS OF WITHOUT SUCH INFORMATIONS FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CIRCUIT BREAKERS BEFORE AUTOMATIC ANDOR MANUAL
SWITCHING IN ELECTRICAL POWER NETWORKS OF ALL VOLTAGE 6+ CAN OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONVENTION
RANGES AL STATIC OR NUMERICAL PROTECTION DEVICES )T REQUIRES
STARTING AND TRIPPING SIGNALS FROM THE FEEDER PROTEC
3INGLE POLE THREE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE TION 7HEN SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED EI
POLE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE IS POSSIBLE FOR OVERHEAD THER DIFFERENT TRIPPING SIGNALS MUST BE AVAILABLE FOR
LINES AS WELL AS MULTIPLE AUTO RECLOSE SEQUENCES SINGLE POLE TRIP AND THREE POLE TRIP OR TRIPPING SIG
4HE DEAD TIMES DURING WHICH THE LINE IS INTERRUPTED NALS MUST BE AVAILABLE FOR THE INDIVIDUAL BREAKER
CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SET FOR SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLO POLES IN ORDER TO ALLOW DISTINCTION TO BE MADE BE
SURE THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2  RAPID AU TWEEN INITIATION OF SINGLE POLE AND THREE POLE AU
TO RECLOSURE AND FOR CONSECUTIVE AUTO RECLOSE TO RECLOSURE
CYCLES $!2  DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE 
/PERATION OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION OF 6+ IN
4HE OPTIONAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNC CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM CHECK
TION OF 6+ CAN CHECK THE CONDITIONS FOR RECLOS RELAY IS POSSIBLE AS WELL OPERATION OF THE CHECK SYN
ING BEFORE THE RELAY ISSUES THE CLOSE COMMAND 4HIS CHRONISM FUNCTION OF 6+ IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN
FUNCTION CHECKS SYNCHRONISM OF THE BUS BAR AND EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE &URTHERMORE TWO
LINE VOLTAGE !LTERNATIVELY IT CAN BE USED TO CHECK PROTECTION DEVICES WITH ONE 6+ OR TWO PROTEC
THAT THE LINE IS DEAD BEFORE IT IS ENERGIZED OR THAT THE TION DEVICES WITH TWO AUTO RECLOSE DEVICES CAN BE
BUS BAR IS DEAD OR BOTH 7HEN DESIRED ASYNCHRO USED
NOUS SWITCHING IS POSSIBLE TOO IN THIS CASE THE DE
VICE CALCULATES THE INSTANT OF THE CLOSE COMMAND 4HROUGHOUT A FAULT IN THE NETWORK THE MAGNITUDES OF
SUCH THAT BOTH VOLTAGES HAVE EQUAL PHASE AT THE MO THE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES ARE STORED FOR A PERIOD OF
MENT WHEN THE BREAKER POLES TOUCH MAX  SECONDS  SECONDS AT  (Z FOR TRANS
MISSION TO A CENTRAL COMPUTER STATION AND ARE AVAIL
4HE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE SUITABLE FOR AUTO RECLO ABLE FOR SUBSEQUENT FAULT ANALYSIS
SURE 7HEN SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS TO BE
PERFORMED THE BREAKER POLES MUST BE SWITCHED INDI #ONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE INTERNAL MEASURED VAL
VIDUALLY 4HE READINESS OF THE BREAKER TO CARRY OUT A UE PROCESSING CIRCUITS AND MONITORING OF THE AUXILIA
TRIP CLOSE CYCLE IS TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION AS WELL RY VOLTAGES TO ENSURE THAT THEY REMAIN WITHIN TOLER
AS THE POSITION OF THE BREAKER PROVIDED THESE INFOR ANCE ARE OBVIOUSLY INHERENT FEATURES
MATIONS ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER 4HE
RECOVERY TIME OF THE BREAKER CAN BE SUPERVISED 3ERIAL INTERFACES ALLOW COMPREHENSIVE COMMUNICA
7HEN SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED THE AUX TION WITH OTHER DIGITAL CONTROL AND STORAGE DEVICES
ILIARY CONTACTS OF THE BREAKER POLES CAN BE CON &OR DATA TRANSMISSION A STANDARDIZED PROTOCOL IN AC
NECTED IN SERIES ALL THREE POLES CLOSED OR IN PARALLEL CORDANCE WITH $).  IS USED 4HE DEVICE CAN
EITHER POLE CLOSED OR BOTH CONNECTION CAN BE FED THEREFORE BE INCORPORATED IN ,OCALIZED 3UBSTATION
TO THE DEVICE !LTERNATIVELY THE AUXILIARY CONTACTS OF !UTOMATION NETWORKS ,3! 

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NTRODUCTION

 &EATURES  )MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS

0ROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH POWERFUL  BIT MICRO !UTOMATIC RECLOSE FUNCTION


PROCESSOR
SINGLE POLE THREE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE
COMPLETE DIGITAL MEASURED VALUE PROCESSING AND POLE
CONTROL FROM DATA ACQUISITION AND DIGITIZING OF THE
MEASURED VALUES UP TO THE CLOSE DECISIONS FOR THE SINGLE OR MULTI SHOT EG 2!2 AND THREE POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER $!2 

COMPLETE GALVANIC AND RELIABLE SEPARATION OF THE WITH SEPARATELY ALLOCATED ACTION TIMES AND DEAD
INTERNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS FROM THE MEASURE TIMES FOR SINGLE POLE THREE POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
MENT CONTROL AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS OF THE SYSTEM FOR FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 DELAYED !2 FOR
WITH SCREENED ANALOG INPUT TRANSDUCERS BINARY FURTHER SHOTS 
INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES AND $# CONVERTER

UNIVERSAL APPLICATION FOR OVERHEAD LINES OF ALL VOLT


AGE RANGES 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL

AUTO RECLOSURE AND SYNCHRONISM CHECK ARE IN SYNCHRONISM CHECK BEFORE AUTO RECLOSURE AFTER
DEPENDENT FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN BE USED INDIVIDU THREE POLE TRIP
ALLY OR WITH EXTERNAL SUPPLEMENTARY UNITS
HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE
CALCULATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES AND DIFFERENCE —5 PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„ AND FRE
INDICATION ON THE FRONT DISPLAY QUENCY DIFFERENCE —F

SIMPLE SETTING AND OPERATION USING THE INTEGRATED SETTABLE ALTERNATIVELY FOR DEAD LINE CHECK ANDOR
OPERATION PANEL OR A CONNECTED PERSONAL DEAD BUS CHECK
COMPUTER WITH MENU GUIDED SOFTWARE
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING POSSIBLE WITH PRE DE
STORAGE OF FAULT DATA STORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS VAL TERMINATION OF THE INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM
UES DURING A FAULT FOR FAULT RECORDING
SETTABLE MINIMUM VOLTAGE
COUNTERS FOR THE NUMBER OF RECLOSING ATTEMPTS
SYNCHRO CHECK DEAD LINE CHECK OR DEAD BUS
COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL CONTROL AND STORAGE CHECK ALSO POSSIBLE BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE OF THE
DEVICES VIA SERIAL INTERFACES IS POSSIBLE WITH OP CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH SEPARATELY SETTABLE CHECK
TIONAL CONNECTION OF OPTICAL FIBRE PROGRAMS

CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE HARDWARE AND SOFT MEASURED VOLTAGES CAN BE CONNECTED EITHER PHA
WARE OF THE RELAY SE TO PHASE OR PHASE TO EARTH

 # ' #


6+ 6 $ESIGN

 $ESIGN

 !RRANGEMENTS

!LL FUNCTIONS INCLUDING DCDC CONVERTER ARE ACCOM 6+J J#JJJ IN HOUSING 80  FOR
MODATED ON ONE PLUG IN MODULE OF $OUBLE %UROPA PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR 6+J J%JJJ FOR
&ORMAT 4HIS MODULE IS INSTALLED IN A HOUSING 80 CUBICLE INSTALLATION
4WO DIFFERENT TYPES OF HOUSINGS CAN BE DELIVERED
4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL
6+J J"JJJ IN HOUSING 80  FOR AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS
PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING TIC WINDOW FOR PANEL MOUNTING

4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL 'UIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF PLUG IN
MODULES /N THE TOP AND BOTTOM PLATES OF THE
AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS
HOUSING CONTACT AREAS WHICH ARE ELECTRICALLY CON
TIC WINDOW
NECTED TO THE HOUSING ARE INSTALLED TO MATE WITH
THE EARTHING SPRINGS OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO
'UIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF PLUG IN EARTH IS MADE BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT
MODULES /N THE TOP AND BOTTOM PLATES OF THE %ARTHING SCREWS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE REAR
HOUSING CONTACT AREAS WHICH ARE ELECTRICALLY CON WALL OF THE HOUSING
NECTED TO THE HOUSING ARE INSTALLED TO MATE WITH
THE EARTHING SPRINGS OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO !LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO CONNECTOR
EARTH IS MADE BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT MODULES WHICH ARE MOUNTED ON THE REAR COVER
%ARTHING SCREWS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE LEFT OVER CUT OUTS &OR EACH ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
HAND SIDE OF THE HOUSING !DDITIONALLY TERMINAL  ONE SCREWED TERMINAL AND ONE PARALLEL SNAP IN
IS CONNECTED TO THE CASE TERMINAL ARE PROVIDED &OR FIELD WIRING THE USE OF
THE SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN
!LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO  SCREWED CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS
TERMINALS WHICH ARE ARRANGED OVER CUT OUTS ON
THE TOP AND BOTTOM COVERS 4HE TERMINALS ARE &OR THE OPTIONAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNEC
NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AT THE TION 6+J JJJJJ J# A MODULE WITH  &
BOTTOM AND TOP 3-! CONNECTORS IS PROVIDED

4HE PLUG MODULES ARE LABELLED ACCORDING TO THEIR


&OR THE OPTIONAL INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL CONTROL AND
MOUNTING POSITION BY MEANS OF A GRID SYSTEM EG
STORAGE UNIT AN ADDITIONAL COUPLING FACILITY HAS
!  4HE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTIONS WITHIN A MODULE
BEEN PROVIDED &OR THE INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE
ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT
CONNECTION MODEL 6+J JJJJJ J# TWO WHEN VIEWED FROM THE REAR EG !  REFER &IG
& 3-! CONNECTORS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED URE 

4HE DEGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0 $EGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0 FOR
FOR THE TERMINALS )0 &OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE RE CUBICLE INSTALLATION )0  FOR THE TERMINALS )0
FER TO &IGURE  &OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE REFER TO &IGURE 

# ' # 


6+ 6 $ESIGN

" !

  
  
  
 


  
  
!
  
 


!   

HORIZONTAL POSITION

VERTICAL POSITION
CONSECUTIVE CONNECTION NUMBER
   

" !

&IGURE  #ONNECTION PLUGS REAR VIEW HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING EXAMPLE

 # ' #


6+ 6 $ESIGN

 $IMENSIONS

&IGURES  AND  SHOW THE DIMENSIONS OF THE VARIOUS TYPES OF HOUSINGS AVAILABLE

6+ (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80 

 

  
 
 

 





   )NTERFACE FOR OPTICAL


 
FIBRE BELOW 2ESET AND
PAGING BUTTONS

 

%ARTHING TERMINAL 

-AX  TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX  MM


/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS
INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR

EG FOR GLASS FIBRE  UM

$IMENSIONS IN MM

&IGURE  $IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80  FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING

# ' # 


6+ 6 $ESIGN

6+ (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80 

   



-OUNTING PLATE

 

 

  

 

$ # !

 

 

 

 

2ESET AND PAGING


BUTTONS
#ONNECTOR MODULES
 

6OLTAGE CONNECTORS
 OR - 3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX  MM

4WIN SPRING CRIMP CONNECTOR IN PARALLEL FOR

MAX  MM

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS


INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR

WITH CERAMIC POST


0ANEL CUT OUT EG FOR GLASS FIBRE  UM

  


$IMENSIONS IN MM
  

&IGURE  $IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80  FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION

 # ' #


6+ 6 $ESIGN

 /RDERING DATA

3INGLE OR 4HREE 0OLE !UTO 2ECLOSURE


2ELAY WITH /PTIONAL 3YNCHRONISM AND          
6OLTAGE #HECK 6+ !   ! 

3YNCHRONISM AN VOLTAGE CHECK

WITHOUT                                          

WITH                                            

!UXILIARY VOLTAGE

 6 DC                                               

 6 DC                                          

 6 DC                                            

#ONSTRUCTION

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING                  "

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING                    #

IN HOUSING 80 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION WITHOUT GLASS FRONT     %

3UPPLEMENTARY ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS

WITHOUT                                                                  

WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND NON VOLATILE ANNUNCIATION MEMORIES                  

3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR COUPLING TO A CONTROL CENTRE

WITHOUT SERIAL INTERFACE                                                               !

WITH SERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION                                          #

# ' # 


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 4ECHNICAL DATA

 'ENERAL DATA

 )NPUTSOUTPUTS

-EASURING CIRCUITS

2ATED VOLTAGE 5.  6 TO  6 SETTABLE

2ATED FREQUENCY F.  (Z (Z SETTABLE

0OWER CONSUMPTION VOLTAGE PATH AT  6 APPROX  6! PER PHASE

/VERLOAD CAPABILITY VOLTAGE PATH


THERMAL RMS  6 CONTINUOUS

!UXILIARY VOLTAGE

0OWER SUPPLY VIA INTEGRATED DCDC CONVERTER

2ATED AUXILIARY VOLTAGE 5(  6DC  6DC  6DC

0ERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS  TO  6DC  TO  6DC  TO  6DC

3UPERIMPOSED AC VOLTAGE PEAK TO PEAK Œ   AT RATED VOLTAGE


Œ   AT LIMITS OF ADMISSIBLE VOLTAGE

0OWER CONSUMPTION QUIESCENT APPROX  7


ENERGIZED APPROX  7

"RIDGING TIME DURING FAILURESHORT CIRCUIT


OF AUXILIARY VOLTAGE   MS AT 5DC   6DC

(EAVY DUTY COMMAND CONTACTS

#OMMAND TRIP RELAYS NUMBER 


#ONTACTS PER RELAYS  ./
3WITCHING CAPACITY -!+%  76!
"2%!+  76!
3WITCHING VOLTAGE  6
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT  ! CONTINUOUS
 ! FOR  S

3IGNAL CONTACTS

3IGNALALARM RELAYS 
#ONTACT PER RELAYS  #/ OR  ./
3WITCHING CAPACITY -!+%"2%!+  76!
3WITCHING VOLTAGE  6
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT  !

 # ' #


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

"INARY INPUTS

.UMBER 
/PERATING VOLTAGE  TO  6DC
#URRENT CONSUMPTION ENERGIZED APPROX  M!
INDEPENDENT OF OPERATING VOLTAGE

3ERIAL INTERFACES

/PERATOR TERMINAL INTERFACE NON ISOLATED

#ONNECTION AT THE FRONT  POLE SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR


ACC )3/ 
FOR CONNECTION OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR

4RANSMISSION SPEED AS DELIVERED  "AUD


MIN  "AUD MAX  "AUD

&LOATING INTERFACE FOR DATA TRANSFER


TO A CONTROL CENTRE OPTIONAL

3TANDARDS PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO $). 

4RANSMISSION SPEED AS DELIVERED  "AUD


MIN  "AUD MAX  "AUD

4RANSMISSION SECURITY (AMMING DISTANCE D  

#ONNECTION OPTICAL FIBRE INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR FOR DIRECT OPTICAL
FIBRE CONNECTION EG GLASS FIBRE  ¿M
FOR FLUSH MOUNTED HOUSING AT THE REAR
FOR SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING ON THE BOTTOM COVER
/PTICAL WAVE LENGTH  NM
0ERMISSIBLE LINE ATTENUATION MAX  D"
4RANSMISSION DISTANCE MAX  KM
.ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION RECONNECTABLE FACTORY SETTING LIGHT OFF

# ' # 


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 %LECTRICAL TESTS

)NSULATION TESTS

3TANDARDS )%#  

(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST  K6 RMS  (Z


EXCEPT DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT

(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST  K6 DC


ONLY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT

)MPULSE VOLTAGE TEST TYPE TEST  K6 PEAK   ¿S  *  POSITIVE
ALL CIRCUITS CLASS ))) AND  NEGATIVE SHOTS AT INTERVALS OF  S

%-# TESTS IMMUNITY TYPE TESTS

3TANDARDS )%#   )%#   PRODUCT STANDARDS


%.   GENERIC STANDARD
6$%  PART 

(IGH FREQUENCY  K6 PEAK   -(Z Ç  ¿S  SHOTSS


)%#    CLASS ))) DURATION  S

%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE  K6 K6 CONTACT DISCHARGE  K6 AIR DISCHARGE


)%#    CLASS ))) BOTH POLARITIES  P& 2I   ¬
AND )%#    CLASS )))

2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD  6M  -(Z TO  -(Z


NON MODULATED )%#    REPORT CLASS œœœ

2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD  6M  -(Z TO  -(Z   !-  K(Z
AMPLITUDE MODULATED )%#    CLASS œœœ

2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PULSE  6M  -(Z REPETITION FREQUENCY  (Z
MODULATED )%#   %.6  CLASS œœœ DUTY CYCLE  

&AST TRANSIENTS
)%#    AND )%#    CLASS œœœ  K6  NS  K(Z BURST LENGTH  MS
REPETITION RATE  MS BOTH POLARITIES 2I   ¬
DURATION  MIN

#ONDUCTED DISTURBANCES INDUCED BY


RADIO FREQUENCY FIELDS AMPLITUDE MODULATED  6  K(Z TO  -(Z   !-  K(Z
)%#    CLASS )))

0OWER FREQUENCY MAGNETIC FIELD


)%#    CLASS )6  !M CONTINUOUS  !M FOR  S  (Z
)%#    M4  (Z

%-# TESTS EMISSION TYPE TESTS

3TANDARD %.  J GENERIC STANDARD

#ONDUCTED INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE AUX VOLTAGE  K(Z TO  -(Z


#)302  %.  CLASS "
)NTERFERENCE FIELD STRENGTH  -(Z TO  -(Z
#)302  %.  CLASS !

 # ' #


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 -ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS

6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING OPERATION

3TANDARDS )%#  


AND )%#  

6IBRATION SINUSOIDAL
)%#    CLASS   (Z TO  (Z ™  MM AMPLITUDE
)%#     (Z TO  (Z  G ACCELERATION
SWEEP RATE  OCTAVEMIN
 CYCLES IN  ORTHOGONAL AXES

3HOCK HALF SINE


)%#    CLASS  ACCELERATION  G DURATION  MS  SHOCKS IN
EACH DIRECTION OF  ORTHOGONAL AXES

3EISMIC VIBRATION SINUSOIDAL


)%#    CLASS   (Z TO  (Z ™  MM AMPLITUDE HOR AXIS
)%#     (Z TO  (Z ™  MM AMPLITUDE VERT AXIS
 (Z TO  (Z  G ACCELERATION HOR AXIS
 (Z TO  (Z  G ACCELERATION VERT AXIS
SWEEP RATE  OCTAVEMIN
 CYCLE IN  ORTHOGONAL AXES

6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING TRANSPORT

3TANDARDS )%#  


AND )%#  

6IBRATION SINUSOIDAL
)%#    CLASS   (Z TO  (Z ™  MM AMPLITUDE
)%#     (Z TO  (Z  G ACCELERATION
SWEEP RATE  OCTAVEMIN
 CYCLES IN  ORTHOGONAL AXES

3HOCK HALF SINE


)%#    CLASS  ACCELERATION  G DURATION  MS  SHOCKS IN
)%#    EACH DIRECTION OF  ORTHOGONAL AXES

#ONTINUOUS SHOCK HALF SINE


)%#    CLASS  ACCELERATION  G DURATION  MS  SHOCKS
)%#    EACH DIRECTION OF  ORTHOGONAL AXES

 #LIMATIC STRESS TESTS

0ERMISSIBLE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

DURING SERVICE  # TO  #
DURING STORAGE  # TO  #
DURING TRANSPORT  # TO  #

3TORAGE AND TRANSPORT WITH STANDARD WORKS PACKAGING

# ' # 


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

0ERMISSIBLE HUMIDITY MEAN VALUE PER YEAR Œ   RELATIVE HUMIDITY


ON  DAYS PER YEAR   RELATIVE HUMIDITY
#ONDENSATION NOT PERMISSIBLE

7E RECOMMEND THAT ALL UNITS ARE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THEY ARE NOT SUBJECTED TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT NOR TO LARGE TEM
PERATURE FLUCTUATIONS WHICH MAY GIVE RISE TO CONDENSATION

 3ERVICE CONDITIONS

4HE RELAY IS DESIGNED FOR USE IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRON NORMALLY NECESSARY FOR SUB STATIONS OF LOWER
MENT FOR INSTALLATION IN STANDARD RELAY ROOMS AND VOLTAGES
COMPARTMENTS SO THAT WITH PROPER INSTALLATION ELEC
TRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# IS ENSURED )T IS NOT PERMISSIBLE TO WITHDRAW OR INSERT INDIVIDU
4HE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALSO BE HEEDED AL MODULES UNDER VOLTAGE )N THE WITHDRAWN CONDI
TION SOME COMPONENTS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY EN
!LL CONTACTORS AND RELAYS WHICH OPERATE IN THE DANGERED DURING HANDLING THE STANDARDS FOR
SAME CUBICLE OR ON THE SAME RELAY PANEL AS THE ELECTROSTATICALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS MUST
DIGITAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHOULD AS A RULE BE BE OBSERVED 4HE MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED
FITTED WITH SUITABLE SPIKE QUENCHING ELEMENTS WHEN PLUGGED IN

!LL EXTERNAL CONNECTION LEADS IN SUB STATIONS 7!2.).' 4HE RELAY IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN RESI
FROM  K6 UPWARDS SHOULD BE SCREENED WITH A DENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR LIGHT INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
SCREEN CAPABLE OF CARRYING POWER CURRENTS AND AS DEFINED IN %. 
EARTHED AT BOTH SIDES .O SPECIAL MEASURES ARE

 $ESIGN

(OUSING 80 REFER TO 3ECTION 

$IMENSIONS REFER TO 3ECTION 

7EIGHT MASS
IN HOUSING FOR SURFACE MOUNTING APPROX  KG
IN HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING APPROX  KG

$EGREE OF PROTECTION ACC TO $). 


(OUSING )0 

4ERMINALS )0 

)0 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION REQUIRED FOR THE POINT OF INSTALLATION MUST BE ENSURED BY THE CUBICLE

 # ' #


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 !UTO RECLOSURE

-AX NUMBER OF POSSIBLE SHOTS  2!2 FIRST SHOT


UP TO  $!2 FURTHER SHOTS

!UTO RECLOSE MODES SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE OR


SINGLETHREE POLE ST SHOT 2!2 
FURTHER SHOTS THREE POLE $!2

0OSSIBLE PROGRAMS FOR 2!2 THREE POLE FOR ALL KINDS OF FAULT
SINGLE POLE NO !2 AFTER THREE POLE TRIP
SINGLE AND THREE POLE DEPENDING ON TRIP
COMMAND

3INGLE POLE TRIP FROM THE FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY IS A PRECONDITION FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2

0OSSIBLE PROGRAMS FOR $!2 $!2 ONLY AFTER 2!2


$!2 ALSO WITHOUT 2!2
NO $!2

!CTION TIMES  S TO  S STEPS  S  0

2!2 DEAD TIME SINGLE POLE  S TO  S STEPS  S


2!2 DEAD TIME THREE POLE  S TO  S STEPS  S
$!2 DEAD TIMES  S TO  S STEPS  S

$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS  S TO  S STEPS  S

2ECLAIM TIME  S TO  S STEPS  S


,OCK OUT TIME  S TO  S STEPS  S  0
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE  S TO  S STEPS  S

$URATION OF 2%#,/3% COMMAND  S TO  S STEPS  S


#IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME  S TO  S STEPS  S  0

# ' # 


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL

/PERATION MODES

#HECK PROGRAMS FOR AUTO RECLOSE CHECK SYNCHRONISM


DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK
DEAD BUS LIVE LINE CHECK
DEAD BUS DEAD LINE CHECK
OVERRIDE
OR COMBINATIONS

ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS POSSIBLE

#HECK PROGRAMS FOR MANUAL CLOSE SAME AS FOR AUTO RECLOSE INDEPENDENT SETTINGS

6OLTAGES

MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE 6

5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK  6 TO  6 STEPS  6


5 FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK  6 TO  6 STEPS  6

MEASURING TOLERANCE   OF SET VALUE OR  6


RESET RATIO APPROX  

—5 MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE  6 TO  6 STEPS  6
MEASURING TOLERANCE 6

—„ MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE  TO  STEPS 
MEASURING TOLERANCE 

—F MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE FOR SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING  (Z TO  (Z STEPS  (Z
SETTING RANGE FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING  (Z TO  (Z STEPS  (Z
MEASURING TOLERANCE  M(Z

MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE  6

4IMES

MINIMUM MEASURING TIME APPROX  MS


APPROX  MS WITH STANDING MEASURED VALUES

ACTIVE TIME  S TO  S STEPS  S

 # ' #


6+ 6 4ECHNICAL DATA

 !NCILLARY FUNCTIONS

/UTPUT OF MEASURED VALUES

/PERATIONAL VALUES OF VOLTAGES 5 5


IN 6 SECONDARY AND K6 PRIMARY
/PERATIONAL VALUE OF FREQUENCY F IN (Z

6OLTAGE DIFFERENCE —5 IN 6 SECONDARY


&REQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F IN (Z
0HASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„ IN DEGREES

-EASURING TOLERANCES Œ   OF RESPECTIVE RATED VALUE

&AULT EVENT DATA STORAGE

3TORAGE OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE THREE LAST FAULT EVENTS

2EAL TIME CLOCK OPTIONAL

2ESOLUTION FOR OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS  MIN


2ESOLUTION FOR FAULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS  MS

#LOCK MODULE OPTIONAL $!,,!3 4YPE $3  K


2!-IFIELD 4)-%+%%0%2
3ELF DISCHARGE TIME  YEARS
-AX TIME DEVIATION  

$ATA STORAGE FOR FAULT RECORDING

3TORAGE PERIOD FAULT DETECTION   MS MAX


FOR OPERATING INTERFACE  MS TO  MS AT  (Z
 MS TO  MS AT  (Z
FOR ,3! INTERFACE  MS TO  MS AT  (Z
 MS TO  MS AT  (Z
3AMPLING RATE  INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER MS AT  (Z
 INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER  MS AT  (Z

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 /PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT

4HE NUMERICAL AUTO RECLOSURE RELAY 6+ IS 4HE TRANSDUCERS OF THE MEASURED VALUE INPUT SEC
EQUIPPED WITH A POWERFUL AND PROVEN  BIT MICRO TION -% TRANSFORM THE VOLTAGES FROM THE MEASURE
PROCESSOR 4HIS PROVIDES FULLY DIGITAL PROCESSING OF MENT TRANSFORMERS OF THE SWITCH GEAR MODELS WITH
ALL FUNCTIONS FROM DATA ACQUISITION OF INPUT VALUES TO SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK AND MATCH THEM TO
THE CLOSE SIGNALS FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER THE INTERNAL PROCESSING LEVEL OF THE UNIT !PART FROM
THE GALVANIC AND LOW CAPACITANCE ISOLATION PRO
&IGURE  SHOWS THE BASE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT VIDED BY THE INPUT TRANSFORMERS FILTERS ARE PROVIDED

,
BUS
, BAR
,

-% !%

¯
,#$ DISPLAY
X CHARACTERS

"LOCKED

3ERVICE

 SIGNALS CAN

¿# BE MARSHALLED

,%$

#7    2ESET  ,%$ CAN BE


MARSHALLED
2   

/PERATOR &   
PANEL
$!  | 0
 X 
-3 *9 .  %
COMMANDS

 BINARY
INPUTS 3ERIAL #ONTROL
INTERFACE CENTRE

3ERIAL 0ERSONAL COM


0OWER
INTERFACE PUTER
SUPPLY

&IGURE  (ARDWARE STRUCTURE OF AUTO RECLOSURE RELAY 6+ FULLY EQUIPPED

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

FOR THE SUPPRESSION OF INTERFERENCE 4HE FILTERS HAVE NAL FROM FEEDER PROTECTION  /UTPUTS INCLUDE IN PAR
BEEN OPTIMIZED WITH REGARD TO BANDWIDTH AND PRO TICULAR CLOSE COMMANDS TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SIG
CESSING SPEED TO SUIT THE MEASURED VALUE PROCESS NALS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING OF IMPORTANT EVENTS AND
ING 4HE MATCHED ANALOG VALUES ARE THEN PASSED TO CONDITIONS AS WELL AS VISUAL INDICATORS ,%$S AND
THE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !% AN ALPHANUMERICAL DISPLAY ON THE FRONT

4HE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !% CONTAINS INPUT AMPLIFI !N INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD IN CONNECTION
ERS SAMPLE AND HOLD ELEMENTS FOR EACH INPUT ANA WITH A BUILT IN ALPHANUMERICAL ,#$ DISPLAY ENABLES
LOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS AND MEMORY CIRCUITS FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE UNIT !LL OPERATIONAL DATA
THE DATA TRANSFER TO THE MICROPROCESSOR SUCH AS SETTING VALUES PLANT DATA ETC ARE ENTERED
INTO THE DEVICE FROM THIS PANEL REFER TO 3ECTION  
!PART FROM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION OF THE MEASURED 5SING THIS PANEL THE PARAMETERS CAN BE RECALLED AND
VALUES THE MICROPROCESSOR PROCESSES THE ACTUAL AU THE RELEVANT DATA FOR THE EVALUATION OF A FAULT CAN BE
TOMATIC FUNCTIONS 4HESE INCLUDE IN PARTICULAR READ OUT AFTER A FAULT HAS OCCURRED REFER TO 3ECTION
  4HE DIALOG WITH THE RELAY CAN BE CARRIED OUT AL
FILTERING AND FORMATION OF THE INPUT QUANTITIES TERNATIVELY VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE IN THE FRONT PLATE BY
MEANS OF AN OPERATOR PANEL OR A PERSONAL COMPUTER
COMPARISON OF THE VOLTAGES WITH THE SETTING VALUES
RELEVANT FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING \5\ \5\ 6IA A SECOND SERIAL INTERFACE OPTIONAL FAULT DATA
\—5\ —F —„ CAN BE TRANSMITTED TO A CENTRAL EVALUATION UNIT $UR
ING HEALTHY OPERATION MEASURED VALUES CAN ALSO BE
SCANNING OF LIMIT VALUES AND TIME SEQUENCES TRANSMITTED EG THE MEASURED VOLTAGES OF BUS BAR
CONTROL OF SIGNALS AND SEQUENCES FOR MANUAL CLOS AND FEEDER 4HIS SECOND INTERFACE IS SUITABLE FOR CON
ING AUTOMATIC RECLOSING AND CLOSING CHECKS NECTION OF OPTICAL FIBRE LINKS

DECISION ABOUT CLOSE COMMANDS ! POWER SUPPLY UNIT PROVIDES THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY ON
THE VARIOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS TO THE DESCRIBED FUNCTIONAL
STORAGE OF MEASURED QUANTITIES DURING A FAULT FOR UNITS  6 IS USED FOR THE RELAY OUTPUTS 4HE ANA
ANALYSIS LOG INPUT REQUIRES q 6 WHEREAS THE PROCESSOR AND
ITS IMMEDIATE PERIPHERALS ARE SUPPLIED WITH  6
"INARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TO AND FROM THE PROCESSOR 4RANSIENT FAILURES IN THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE UP TO  MS
ARE CHANNELLED VIA THE INPUTOUTPUT ELEMENTS &ROM WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING SHORT CIRCUITS IN THE DC
THESE THE PROCESSOR RECEIVES INFORMATION FROM THE SUPPLY SYSTEM OF THE PLANT ARE BRIDGED BY A DC VOLT
SWITCH GEAR EG READINESS SIGNAL FROM THE CIRCUIT AGE STORAGE ELEMENT RATED AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
BREAKER OR FROM OTHER EQUIPMENT EG INITIATION SIG   6DC 

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 !UTOMATIC RECLOSURE

 'ENERAL

%XPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT APPROXIMATELY   OF AUTO RECLOSE RELAY WITH SEPARATE FEEDER PROTECTION
SHORT CIRCUITS ARE CAUSED BY AN ARC ON OVERHEAD EXAMPLE SEE 3ECTION  
LINES AND SELF EXTINGUISH AFTER INTERRUPTION BY THE
PROTECTIVE DEVICE 4HE LINE CAN THEREFORE BE RE EN 4HE POSSIBLE PROGRAMS OF THE !2 FUNCTION FOR THE
ERGIZED 4HIS IS CARRIED OUT BY THE AUTOMATIC RECLO FIRST !2 CYCLE DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH 2!2
SURE !2 FUNCTION &IGURE  SHOWS AN EXAMPLE FOR RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE ARE
THE TIME SEQUENCE OF A TWO SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
WITH A 2!2 CYCLE FOLLOWED BY A $!2 CYCLE 2!2 02/'  4(2%% 0/,% IE ALL TYPES OF
FAULTS RESULT IN THREE POLE !2
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLES CAN BE TRIPPED INDIVIDUAL
LY THEN !2 IS OFTEN CARRIED OUT SINGLE POLE FOR SING 2!2 02/'  3).',% 0/,% IE SINGLE
LE PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI PHASE PHASE FAULTS RESULT IN SINGLE
FAULTS IN NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT )F THE SHORT POLE !2 MULTI PHASE FAULTS IN
CIRCUIT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER THE AUTO RECLOSURE ARC THREE POLE FINAL DISCONNECTION
NOT QUENCHED OR METALLIC SHORT CIRCUIT THEN THE PRO
TECTIVE RELAY FINALLY DISCONNECTS THE POWER -ULTIPLE 2!2 02/'  3).',%4(2%% 0/,E IE
AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS OFTEN WITH A FIRST RAPID SINGLE PHASE FAULTS RESULT IN
AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 AND SUBSEQUENT DELAYED SINGLE POLE !2 MULTI PHASE
AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES $!2 ARE POSSIBLE IN SOME FAULTS IN THREE POLE !2
NETWORKS
)F MORE THAN ONE RECLOSE ATTEMPT WILL BE CARRIED OUT
6+ ALLOWS AUTOMATIC THREE POLE SINGLE POLE THE SECOND AND ANY FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE ARE
SINGLE AND THREE POLE AS WELL AS SINGLE AND MUL DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED
TI SHOT RECLOSURE 7ITH MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE AUTO RECLOSURE INDEPENDENT ON THE SETTING OF THE
THE FIRST SHOT IS DESIGNATED WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RE DEAD TIMES OF THE CYCLES )T IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE
CLOSURE AND THE SUBSEQUENT SHOTS ARE DESIGNATED 2!2 CYCLE SO THAT ONLY $!2 CYCLES OCCUR $!2
WITH $!2 DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE INDEPENDENT ON CYCLES ARE ALWAYS THREE POLE &OR THE $!2 FUNC
THE REAL SETTING OF THE DEAD TIMES OF THE AUTO RE TION THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMS ARE SELECTABLE
CLOSE CYCLES
$!2 02/'  ./ $!2 IE NO $!2 OCCURS UN
)N ORDER TO PERFORM SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE AND SUCCESSFUL 2!2 RESULTS IN FINAL
THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE TRIP
FEEDER PROTECTION IS ABLE TO ISSUE PHASE SEGREGATED
TRIP COMMANDS $!2 02/'  $!2 7)4(/54 2!2 IE $!2
CYCLES CAN BE CARRIED OUT EVEN
3IGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE FEEDER PROTECTION AND WITHOUT A PRECEDING 2!2 CYCLE
THE 6+ AUTO RECLOSE UNIT MUST BE ACCOM EG 2!2 IS BY PASSED BE
PLISHED VIA THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS OF THE UNIT CAUSE BLOCKED 

&URTHERMORE IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO ALLOW THE 6+ $!2 02/'  $!2 !&4%2 2!2 IE THE $!2
TO BE TRIGGERED FROM MORE THAN ONE PROTECTION RELAYS CYCLES CAN ONLY BE INITIATED AFTER
EG MAIN PROTECTION AND ALTERNATE PROTECTION SEE AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
3ECTION   )N THIS CASE 6+ CAN PERFORM
THREE POLE COUPLING FOR BOTH FEEDER PROTECTION RE 0REREQUISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS AL
LAYS IF ONLY ONE RELAY TRIPS MULTI POLE OR IF THE PROTEC WAYS THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR OPERATION
TION RELAYS MAKE ATTEMPT TO TRIP SINGLE POLE IN DIFFER WHEN PICK UP OCCURS 4HIS INFORMATION IS TRANS
ENT PHASES MITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A BINARY INPUT

4HE USE OF TWO 6+ RELAYS WITH TWO FEEDER PRO &URTHERMORE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED IF THE TRIPPING
TECTION RELAYS IS ALSO POSSIBLE AS WELL AS THE USE OF COMMAND OCCURS AFTER THE ACTION TIME WHICH CAN BE
ONE 6+ WITH A FEEDER PROTECTION AND A SECOND SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR 2!2 AND $!2

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

E
)- M
! IT
,
% # M
I
3 %
2 LA
/ C
, E
# 4 2

E ,
M R /
IT E 0
H
TR 
D
A U
E F
4
D D 2
D N !
N A
 $



4
#
!

4
2
!
$

,
/
0
, , 
/ /
0 0 4
E   2
M !
IT 4 4  2
,
D 2 2 2
/
A ! ! # 0
E 2 2 )3 
D
T E E $
L L 4
S O O
 P P 4 2 D
E
TT
!
2 I
 
O M
T R
R E
 E P
4 V
# 2
O !
! G E
L
4 IN O
H P
2 TC
I
!
2 W 
E 3 IF
M
IT
N
 O
IT E
C E A M
IT
E M
T
E E IT IN
S M
D N IM
R
I
LT LO O
IT C LA
U C C
A IP
R E C IS E
& 4 2 ! $ 2

&IGURE  $IAGRAM OF AN AUTO RECLOSURE SEQUENCE 2!2 CYCLE FOLLOWED BY A $!2 CYCLE

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RE  !CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES
CLOSURE

&OR THE AUTO RECLOSURE SEQUENCE TO BE SUCCESSFUL )T IS OFTEN APPROPRIATE TO PREVENT READINESS FOR RECLO
FAULTS ON ANY PART OF THE LINE MUST BE CLEARED FROM SURE WHEN THE FAULT HAS PERSISTED FOR A SPECIFIED
BOTH LINE ENDS WITHIN THE SAME SHORTEST POSSI TIME FOR EXAMPLE WHEN IT CAN BE ASSUMED THAT THE
BLE TIME 5SUALLY THEREFORE AN INSTANTANEOUS ARC HAS BURNT ITSELF IN TO SUCH AN EXTENT THAT THERE IS
STAGE OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS SET TO OPERATE NO CHANCE OF NATURAL QUENCHING DURING THE DEAD
BEFORE A RECLOSURE BY THE !2 UNIT TIME

)F THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS EQUIPPED WITH A 4RIPPING AFTER FAULTS WHICH ARE CLEARED IN A DELAYED
SO CALLED 2!2 STAGE THEN THIS STAGE CAN BE ACTI TIME SHOULD FOR REASONS OF SELECTIVITY REFER FOREGO
VATED BY 6+ THE OUTPUT SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE ING SECTION NOT RESULT IN AN AUTO RECLOSURE EITHER
2EL IS AVAILABLE AS LONG AS THE 2!2 FUNCTION IS
READY FOR RECLOSE AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE LINE 4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 6+ ARE PROVIDED WITH SET
TABLE ACTION TIMES SEPARATE FOR 2!2 AND $!2 WHICH
)F THE FEEDER PROTECTION INCORPORATES THE FACILITY TO AC ARE STARTED BY THE FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE FEEDER
TIVATE ITS 2!2 STAGE ONLY IN CASE OF SINGLE PHASE PROTECTION )F AFTER EXPIRY OF THE ACTION TIME NO TRIP
FAULTS BUT NOT IN CASE OF THREE PHASE FAULTS THE 2!2 PING SIGNAL HAS BEEN GIVEN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
FUNCTION OF 6+ CAN GIVE THE OUTPUT SIGNAL 2!2
P 0ROG IN ADDITION TO 2!2 :ONE 2EL WHICH 4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 6+ ARE PROVIDED WITH
MEANS THAT THE 2!2 FUNCTION WILL RECLOSE ONLY IN CASE THREE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIMES WHICH DO NOT DISCRIMI
OF SINGLE POLE TRIP BUT NOT AFTER THREE POLE TRIP THAT NATE BETWEEN 2!2 AND $!2 'ENERALLY THE RECLAIM
IS THE CASE WHEN THE 2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO TIME IS THE TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH NO FURTHER RECLO
SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE SURE ATTEMPT IS PERMITTED
)F THE FEEDER PROTECTION IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADDITION 4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- IS STARTED AT EVERY RE
AL SO CALLED $!2 STAGE THIS CAN BE ACTIVATED BY CLOSE COMMAND )F AUTO RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUC
6+ THROUGH THE OUTPUT SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE CESSFUL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION
2EL WHICH IS PRESENT AS LONG AS THE $!2 FUNCTION
AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 2%#,!)- ANY FAULT OCCURRING AFTER
IS READY TO RECLOSE AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE LINE
THE EXPIRY OF THE RECLAIM TIME IS CONSIDERED TO BE A
NEW SYSTEM FAULT 7HEN A RENEWED TRIP COMMAND IS
)F NO RECLOSURE IS EXPECTED EG CIRCUIT BREAKER NOT
GIVEN WITHIN THIS RECLAIM TIME THE NEXT AUTO RECLOSE
READY FOR A TRIP CLOSE CYCLE OR ACTION TIME EXPIRED
CYCLE IS STARTED IF MULTI SHOT !2 IS PERMITTED IF NO
THEN THE ABOVE MENTIONED RELEASE SIGNALS ARE NOT IS
FURTHER !2 CYCLE IS PERMITTED A RENEWED TRIP COM
SUED 4HE FEEDER PROTECTION THEN HAS TO OPERATE AC
MAND WITHIN THE RECLAIM TIME IS FINAL !2 HAS BEEN
CORDING TO THE TIME GRADING PLAN IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE
UNSUCCESSFUL
SELECTIVITY

)T IS POSSIBLE TO BLOCK THE !2 FUNCTIONS IN COMMON OR 4HE LOCK OUT TIME AFTER DYNAMIC BLOCKING 4",/#+
SEPARATE FOR 2!2 OR $!2 FROM EXTERNAL CRITERIA IE $9. IS THE TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH ANY FURTHER
FROM THE PLANT OR FROM OTHER PROTECTION DEVICES  4HE CLOSE COMMAND BY THE 6+ RELAY IS BLOCKED AFTER
RELEASE SIGNALS OF 6+ ARE NOT ISSUED IN THIS CASE FINAL DISCONNECTION 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL CLOSING AT
EITHER TEMPTS WHICH ARE PERFORMED BY THE RELAY )F THIS TIME
IS SET TO 0 CLOSING IS LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION
4HE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION PROVIDES AN ACTION TIME IS RESET BY ENERGIZATION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2E
FOR EACH OF 2!2 AND $!2 FUNCTION WHICH CAN SEPA SET  !FTER THE RESET SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE
RATELY SET 4HE ACTION TIMES ARE STARTED WITH ANY FAULT QUIESCENT CONDITION
DETECTION OF A SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION WHICH SHALL
TRIGGER THE !2 FUNCTION )F THE ACTION TIME HAS ELAPSED ! SPECIAL RECLAIM TIME 4",/#+ -# IS PROVIDED FOR
BEFORE ANY TRIP SIGNAL IS GIVEN IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE MANUAL CLOSING $URING THIS TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE
FAULT IS NOT ON THE PROTECTED LINE BUT ON A DIFFERENT RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED ANY TRIP COMMAND WILL BE A FINAL
LINE AUTO RECLOSURE IS NOT INITIATED THREE POLE TRIP

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 )NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF  4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE


THE CIRCUIT BREAKER

0RE CONDITION FOR A RECLOSE ATTEMPT AFTER SHORT CIR 4HE 2!2 FUNCTION OF 6+ INFORMS THE FEEDER PRO
CUIT INTERRUPTION IS THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR TECTION ABOUT READINESS FOR RECLOSURE BY ITS OUTPUT
AT LEAST ONE 42)0 #,/3% 42)0 CYCLE WHEN THE SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE 2EL IN ORDER TO ALLOW THE FEED
!2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED IE AT THE INSTANT OF TRIP COM ER PROTECTION TO TRIP IN ITS 2!2 ZONE IF AVAILABLE  4HE
MAND  4HE READINESS INFORMATION FROM THE BREAKER ACTION TIME REFER TO 3ECTION  OF THE 2!2 FUNC
HAS TO BE TRANSMITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A BINARY INPUT TION IS STARTED WITH THE FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE
)N CASE THAT SUCH READINESS INFORMATION IS NOT AVAIL FEEDER PROTECTION VIA THE BINARY INPUT 3TART !2 
ABLE INTERROGATION CAN BE SUPPRESSED SINCE OTHER
WISE NO AUTO RECLOSE WOULD BE POSSIBLE AT ALL 4HE FEEDER PROTECTION TRIPS THREE POLE FOR ALL FAULTS
WITHIN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 EG THE DISTANCE PRO
7HEN SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERFORMED IT IS TECTION IN OVERREACHING ZONE  4HE !2 FUNCTION OF
SUFFICIENT TO INTERROGATE THE BREAKER READINESS ONE 6+ IS INFORMED VIA ANY OF THE BINARY INPUTS
SINGLE TIME BEFORE INITIATION OF !2 !S FOR EXAMPLE 4RIP ,
!2  2!2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED PROVIDED
TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME REFER TO 3EC
THE AIR PRESSURE FOR BREAKER OPERATION WILL COLLAPSE
TION   7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE SETTABLE DEAD
DURING THE TRIP EXECUTION NO FURTHER INTERROGATION
TIME 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR THREE POLE
SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT
2!2 SIMULTANEOUSLY THE SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE 2EL
DISAPPEARS /N EXPIRY OF THE DEAD TIME THE CIRCUIT
7HEN MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED IT IS AD BREAKER RECEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION
VANTAGEOUS TO INTERROGATE BREAKER READINESS NOT OF WHICH IS SETTABLE AND THE SETTABLE  4HE RECLAIM
ONLY AT THE INSTANT OF THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND BUT ALSO TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  IS STARTED
BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE ATTEMPT OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER
RECLOSE ATTEMPT )F THIS FACILITY IS SELECTED RECLOSURE )F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM
IS BLOCKED AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT READY TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  EXPIRES AND ALL
FOR ANOTHER 42)0 #,/3% SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS OF 6+ RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDI
TION 4HE NETWORK FAULT IS CLEARED THE !2 FUNCTIONS
4HE RECOVERY TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN BE SU ARE READY FOR A NEW FAULT
PERVISED BY THE 6+ RELAY 4HIS SUPERVISION TIME
4 #" 3506 WILL RUN AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER )F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2
DOES NOT INFORM ABOUT READINESS )N THIS CASE THE THEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL
DEAD TIME MAY BE EXTENDED WHEN THE BREAKER IS NOT DISCONNECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2
READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SET DEAD TIME "UT IF THE !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RECLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN
BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SUPERVI FINAL DISCONNECTION
SION TIME THEN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED 4HIS BLOCKING IS
CANCELED ONLY AFTER THE LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. !FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE
REFER 3ECTION  HAS ELAPSED )F 4",/#+ $9. IS LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. 3ECTION  IS
SET TO 0 CLOSING IS LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION IS STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM
RESET BY ENERGIZATION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2E 6+ IS LOCKED
SET  !FTER THE RESET SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE
QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
SHOT 2!2 7ITH 6+ MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
TO  $!2 SHOTS REFER TO 3ECTION  ARE ALSO POS
SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER TO 3ECTION  

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE  3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO
RECLOSURE
7HEN ONLY SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS CARRIED
OUT 6+ ISSUES THE CONTINUOUS OUTPUT SIGNAL 4HE 2!2 FUNCTION OF 6+ INFORMS THE FEEDER PRO
2!2 P 0ROG WHICH INDICATES THAT RECLOSURE WILL TECTION ABOUT READINESS FOR RECLOSURE BY ITS OUTPUT
BE CARRIED OUT ONLY IN CASE OF SINGLE POLE TRIP 4HE SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE 2EL IN ORDER TO ALLOW THE FEED
2!2 FUNCTION OF 6+ INFORMS THE FEEDER PROTEC ER PROTECTION TO TRIP IN ITS 2!2 ZONE IF AVAILABLE AND
TION ABOUT READINESS FOR RECLOSURE BY ITS OUTPUT SIG ISSUES OUTPUT SIGNAL P 4RIP 0ERM IE SING
NAL 2!2 :ONE 2EL AND ISSUES OUTPUT SIGNAL LE POLE TRIP PERMISSION THE LOGICAL INVERSION OF
P 4RIP 0ERM IE SINGLE POLE TRIP PERMIS THREE POLE COUPLING  4HE ACTION TIME REFER TO 3EC
SION THE LOGICAL INVERSION OF THREE POLE COUPLING  TION  OF THE 2!2 FUNCTION IS STARTED WITH THE FAULT
4HE ACTION TIME REFER TO 3ECTION  OF THE 2!2 DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION VIA THE
FUNCTION IS STARTED WITH THE FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL OF BINARY INPUT 3TART !2 
THE FEEDER PROTECTION VIA THE BINARY INPUT 3TART
!2  4HE FEEDER PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE FOR SINGLE
PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS
4HE FEEDER PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE IF A SINGLE
4HE !2 FUNCTION OF 6+ IS INFORMED VIA THE
PHASE FAULT IS DETECTED IN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2
BINARY INPUTS 4RIP , !2 OR 4RIP , !2
4HE !2 FUNCTION OF 6+ IS INFORMED VIA THE
OR 4RIP , !2  2!2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED PRO
BINARY INPUTS 4RIP , !2 OR 4RIP , !2
VIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME REFER TO
OR 4RIP , !2  2!2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED PRO
3ECTION   7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE SETTABLE
VIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME REFER TO
DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR SINGLE
3ECTION   7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE SETTABLE
POLE 2!2 OR THE SEPARATELY SETTABLE DEAD TIME
DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR SINGLE
2!2 4 0/, FOR THREE POLE 2!2 THE OUTPUT SIGNAL
POLE 2!2 THE OUTPUT SIGNAL P 4RIP 0ERM DIS
P 4RIP 0ERM DISAPPEARS !FTER THE DEAD TIME
APPEARS !FTER THE DEAD TIME THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RE
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RECEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE
CEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS
SETTABLE 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE SIGNAL 2!2 :ONE DURATION OF WHICH IS SETTABLE 4HE SETTABLE RECLAIM
2EL DISAPPEARS AND THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  IS STARTED
4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  IS STARTED
)F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM
)F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  EXPIRES AND ALL
TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION  EXPIRES AND ALL FUNCTIONS OF 6+ RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDI
FUNCTIONS OF 6+ RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDI TION 4HE NETWORK FAULT IS CLEARED THE !2 FUNCTIONS
TION 4HE NETWORK FAULT IS CLEARED THE !2 FUNCTIONS ARE READY FOR A NEW FAULT
ARE READY FOR A NEW FAULT
)F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2
)F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2 THEN THE FEEDER PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL DISCON
THEN FEEDER PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL DISCONNEC NECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2 !LSO
TION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2 !LSO EVERY EVERY FAULT DURING THE RECLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL
FAULT DURING THE RECLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL DISCON DISCONNECTION
NECTION
!FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE
!FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. 3ECTION  IS
LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. 3ECTION  IS STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM
STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 6+ IS LOCKED
6+ IS LOCKED
4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
!FTER OCCURRENCES OF MULTI PHASE FAULTS THE SHORT SHOT 2!2 7ITH 6+ MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS FINALLY THREE POLE %VERY TO  $!2 SHOTS REFER TO 3ECTION  ARE ALSO POS
THREE POLE TRIP IS A FINAL TRIP 4HE LOCK OUT TIME SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
4",/#+ $9. 3ECTION  IS STARTED &OR THIS TIME BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 6+ IS LOCKED CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER TO 3ECTION  

)N THIS MODE ONLY SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS


POSSIBLE

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS FOR  -ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
4HE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION OF 6+ WILL ALSO PER
7HEN SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE POLE MIT MULTI SHOT RECLOSURE UP TO  CONSECUTIVE $!2
AUTO RECLOSURES ARE CARRIED OUT IN THE NETWORK SPE CYCLES 4HE SECOND AND EACH FURTHER CYCLE ARE AL
CIAL ATTENTION HAS TO BE DIRECTED TO EVOLVING FAULTS WAYS THREE POLE 4HE $!2 FUNCTION OF 6+ IN
%VOLVING FAULTS ARE HERE DEFINED AS THOSE WHICH AFTER FORMS THE FEEDER PROTECTION ABOUT READINESS FOR RE
CLEARANCE OF THE FIRST DETECTED FAULT OCCUR DURING CLOSURE BY ITS OUTPUT SIGNAL $!2 :ONE 2EL  4HE
THE DEAD TIME OF AN !2 CYCLE SEPARATELY SET ACTION TIME REFER TO 3ECTION  OF
THE $!2 FUNCTION IS STARTED WITH THE FAULT DETECTION
4HE EVOLVING FAULT IS DETECTED BY THE FEEDER PROTEC SIGNAL OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION VIA THE BINARY INPUT
TION )T INFORMS THE !2 FUNCTION BY OUTPUTTING THE FAULT 3TART !2 
DETECTION AND TRIP SIGNALS THROUGH BINARY INPUTS 4HE
CRITERION FOR RECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS CAN BE SE $IFFERENT NUMBERS OF $!2 CYCLES CAN BE SET FOR SING
LECTED IN 6+ TO BE EITHER 42)0 #/--!.$ DUR LE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI PHASE FAULT TRIPPING
ING THE DEAD TIME OR ANY FURTHER &!5,4 $%4%#TION COMMAND IS NEVERTHELESS ALWAYS THREE POLE 4HE
FROM THE FEEDER PROTECTION SET NUMBER OF $!2 CYCLES DOES NOT INCLUDE THE FIRST
2!2 CYCLE
4HE REACTION OF THE !2 FUNCTION TO A RECOGNIZED
EVOLVING FAULT CAN ALSO BE SELECTED $EAD TIMES CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SET FOR THE FIRST THREE
!2 CYCLES FURTHER CYCLES OPERATE WITH THE DEAD TIME
A ./ SPECIAL REACTION TO EVOLVING FAULTS OF THE THIRD CYCLE )N THIS CASE ALL !2 CYCLES ARE DECI
SIVE IE ALSO THE 2!2 CYCLE 4HE 2!2 CYCLE OPERATES
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED WITH ITS DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, FOR SINGLE OR 2!2
THE UNIT SWITCHES TO THE THREE POLE AUTO RECLO 4 0/, FOR THREE POLE 2!2 THE FIRST $!2 IS THE
SURE CYCLE %VERY TRIP WILL BE THREE POLE )F THREE SECOND CYCLE WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE SECOND
POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERMITTED THEN THE DEAD CYCLE $!2 40/, ETC )F NO 2!2 CYCLE HAS OC
TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE BEGINS SI CURRED EG 2!2 BLOCKED THEN THE FIRST $!2 CYCLE
MULTANEOUSLY WITH THE INTERRUPTION OF THE EVOLVING OPERATES WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST CYCLE $!2
FAULT 7HEN THE DEAD TIME HAS EXPIRED THE CIRCUIT 40/, ETC
BREAKER RECEIVES THE COMMAND TO CLOSE 4HE FUR
THER SEQUENCE IS THE SAME AS FOR SINGLE AND %ACH NEW PICK UP RESTARTS THE ACTION TIME
THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE $!2 4 !#4 WITHIN WHICH A TRIPPING COMMAND MUST
OCCUR !FTER FAULT CLEARANCE WITHIN THE ACTION TIME THE
4HE TOTAL DEAD TIME IN THIS CASE CONSISTS OF THE DEAD TIME BEGINS !T THE END OF THIS THE CIRCUIT
DEAD TIME FOR THE SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE BREAKER IS GIVEN A NEW CLOSING COMMAND 3IMULTA
WHICH HAS EXPIRED WHEN THE EVOLVING FAULT IS INTER NEOUSLY THE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION
RUPTED PLUS THE DEAD TIME FOR THE THREE POLE  IS STARTED
AUTO RECLOSURE 4HIS IS USEFUL BECAUSE ONLY THE
DEAD TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS OF IM )F ONE OF THE CYCLES IS SUCCESSFUL THAT IS AFTER RECLOSE
PORTANCE FOR THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK THE FAULT IS NO LONGER PRESENT THE RECLAIM TIME 4
2%#,!)- 3ECTION  RUNS OUT AND ALL FUNCTIONS
B "LOCKING OF RECLOSURE AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS !, OF 6+ RETURN TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NET
7!93 WORK FAULT IS CLEARED THE !2 FUNCTIONS ARE READY FOR A
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED NEW FAULT
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED %VERY TRIP WILL BE THREE POLE
REGARDLESS WHETHER THREE POLE !2 IS PERMITTED OR !S LONG AS THE PERMITTED NUMBER OF CYCLES HAS NOT
NOT BEEN REACHED THE RECLAIM TIME IS RESET BY EACH NEW
TRIP COMMAND AND RECOMMENCES WITH THE NEXT CLOS
C "LOCKING AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS AFTER AN ADJUSTABLE ING COMMAND
DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2
)F NONE OF THE !2 CYCLES HAVE BEEN SUCCESSFUL THEN
4HE DISCRIMINATION TIME STARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL DIS
WITH THE SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME )T IS USED TO DIS CONNECTION AFTER THE LAST PERMISSIBLE CYCLE 4HE
CRIMINATE FROM WHICH POINT IN TIME AN EVOLVING LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. 3ECTION  IS
FAULT IS IDENTIFIED AS SUCH )F THE EVOLVING FAULT OC STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM
CURS BEFORE THE EXPIRY OF THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 6+ IS LOCKED
THE DEVICE IS SWITCHED TO A THREE POLE !2 CYCLE
IF PERMITTED AS UNDER A  )F HOWEVER THE EVOLVING 4HE SUBSEQUENT CYCLES $!2 CAN BE BLOCKED BY A
FAULT OCCURS AFTER THE DISCRIMINATION TIME HAS EX BINARY INPUT INDEPENDENTLY OF THE FUNCTION OF THE
PIRED RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED AS UNDER B  2!2 CYCLE

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 #ONTROL OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY TWO PROTECTIVE RELAYS

&OR LINES WITH TWO PROTECTIVE RELAYS EG MAIN PROTEC )N THIS CASE THE DEAD TIME IS DERIVED FROM THESE SIG
TION AND ALTERNATE PROTECTION THE AUTO RECLOSE NALS "UT WITH TWO PROTECTION RELAYS THE !2 FUNCTION
FUNCTION CAN BE CONTROLLED BY BOTH FEEDER PROTECTION CANNOT RECOGNIZE WHETHER THE TWO SINGLE POLE TRIP
RELAYS IN PARALLEL COMMANDS HAVE BEEN OCCURRED IN THE SAME PHASE
SO THAT EXTERNAL MEASURES ARE NECESSARY TO BLOCK RE
4HE FOLLOWING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS OF 6+ ARE SUIT CLOSURE AND TO COUPLE THE THREE POLES
ABLE FOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROTECTION RELAYS
4O COUPLE THE PROTECTION RELAYS THREE POLE AND TO
4HE !2 FUNCTION CAN BE STARTED VIA THE BINARY IN RELEASE THEIR !2 STAGES IF AVAILABLE THE FOLLOWING
PUTS FROM BOTH FEEDER PROTECTION RELAYS CONNECTED OUTPUT FUNCTIONS ARE SUITABLE
IN PARALLEL
P 4RIP 0ERM !2 READY FOR SINGLE POLE RE
3TART !2 'ENERAL START SIGNAL FOR !2 CLOSURE LOGICAL INVERSION OF
&.O  THREE POLE COUPLING &.O

4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR !2
&.O  2!2 :ONE 2EL !2 IS READY FOR AN 2!2 CYCLE
IE RELEASES 2!2 ZONE FOR THE
4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR !2 EXTERNAL PROTECTION RELAY &.O
&.O  

4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR !2 $!2 :ONE 2EL !2 IS READY FOR A $!2 CYCLE
&.O   IE RELEASES $!2 ZONE FOR THE
EXTERNAL PROTECTION RELAY &.O
4HE GENERAL START SIGNAL IS THE CRITERION FOR THE START OF 
THE ACTION TIME !T THE ISSUE OF THE TRIPPING COMMAND
IT IS DECIDED WHETHER THE DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 P 0ROG 2!2 PROGRAMMED TO SINGLE
!2 OR THREE POLE !2 WILL BE EFFECTIVE OR IF RECLOSURE POLE RECLOSURE ONLY IE RE
IS BLOCKED FOR THREE POLE TRIPPING DEPENDENT UPON CLOSES ONLY AFTER SINGLE POLE
THE SET !2 PROGRAM  4HE !2 FUNCTION OF 6+ REC TRIP &.O  
OGNIZES A MULTI POLE TRIP EVEN IN CASE EACH OF THE
FEEDER PROTECTION RELAYS DETECT A SINGLE PHASE FAULT 6+ ISSUES NO PERMISSION FOR SINGLE POLE TRIP
BUT IN DIFFERENT PHASES IE PERFORMS THREE POLE COUPLING WHEN TRIP SIG
NALS OCCUR IN MORE THAN ONE PHASE THUS IN CASE
)F ONLY THREE POLE !2 IS TO BE CARRIED OUT IT IS SUFFI EACH OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION RELAYS TRIPS A SINGLE
CIENT TO USE ANY CONVENIENT BINARY INPUT FOR THE TRIP PHASE FAULT BUT IN DIFFERENT PHASES THREE POLE TRIP
PING SIGNAL PING WILL BE EFFECTED

!LTERNATIVELY THE FOLLOWING TRIP SIGNALS CAN BE INPUT $EPENDING ON THE ACTUAL APPLICATION AND THE USED
TO 6+ PROVIDED THESE ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE FUNCTIONS OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ONE OR THE
FEEDER PROTECTION OTHER INPUT OR OUTPUT CAN BE OMITTED %G FOR THREE
POLE !2 ONLY THE GENERAL START GENERAL TRIP SIGNALS
4RIP P !2 4RIPPING COMMAND SINGLE MUST BE INPUT AND 2!2 :ONE 2EL IS OUTPUT
POLE FOR !2 &.O  FROM 6+

4RIP P !2 4RIPPING COMMAND THREE


POLE FOR !2 &.O 

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO AUTO RECLOSE DEVICES

)F A FEEDER IS EQUIPPED WITH DUPLICATED PROTECTION COUPLING SHOULD BE ARRANGED WITH AN EXTERNAL COU
AND EACH PROTECTION RELAY SHOULD CONTROL ITS OWN AU PLING UNIT WHICH INTERACTS DIRECTLY WITH THE CIRCUIT
TO RECLOSE DEVICE CERTAIN EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION BREAKER TRIP CIRCUITS 4HIS ENSURES THREE POLE TRIP
IS NECESSARY BETWEEN THE TWO COMBINATIONS 4HIS IS PING UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES OF MULTI POLE FAULTS
SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE IN &IGURE  4HREE POLE

ND !2
6+ DEVICE

3 !2 BLOCK INT !2 BLOCK INT 3


, ,

") !2 BLOCKED !2 BLOCKED ")


, ,

") 3TART !2 3TART !2 ")

") 4RIP , FOR !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")

") 4RIP , FOR !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")

") 4RIP , FOR !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")

, ,

ST PROTECTION ND PROTECTION


, RELAY RELAY
,
3 'EN &AULT 'EN &AULT 3

3 4RIP , 4RIP , 3

3 4RIP , 4RIP , 3

3 4RIP , 4RIP , 3

, ,
# 4RIP , 4RIP , #

# 4RIP , 4RIP , #

# 4RIP , 4RIP , #

") "INARY INPUT


3 3IGNALLING OUTPUT POLE

# 4RIP COMMAND COUPLING

, , ,
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER

&IGURE  #ONNECTION EXAMPLE FOR  PROTECTION RELAYS WITH  AUTO RECLOSURE DEVICES

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK

 'ENERAL

4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION WILL EN 7HEN A POWER TRANSFORMER IS SITUATED BETWEEN THE
SURE WHEN SWITCHING A LINE ONTO BUS BARS THAT THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE
STABILITY OF THE NETWORK WILL NOT BE ENDANGERED 4HE TRANSFORMER &IGURE  ITS VECTOR GROUP CAN BE
FUNCTION CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM THE SYN MATCHED BY THE 6+ RELAY SO THAT NO EXTERNAL
CHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ONLY FOR AUTO RECLOSE MATCHING TRANSFORMERS ARE NECESSARY
ONLY FOR MANUAL CLOSE OR FOR BOTH CASES $IFFERENT
PERMISSION CRITERIA CAN ALSO BE PROGRAMMED FOR AU
TOMATIC CLOSE AND FOR MANUAL CLOSE
"US BAR
4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ELEMENT USES
THE FEEDER VOLTAGE DESIGNATED WITH 5 AND THE
BUS BAR VOLTAGE DESIGNATED WITH 5 FOR COM
PARISON OF THE TWO VOLTAGES 4HESE VOLTAGES CAN BE
) 5
ANY CONVENIENT PHASE TO EARTH OR PHASE TO
PHASE VOLTAGE BUT MUST BE THE SAME ON THE FEEDER
SIDE AND ON THE BUS BAR SIDE

42)0 0ROTECTION

6+
"US BAR

#,/3%

3YNC
&EEDER

) 5 5

,
$ISCREPANCY
SWITCH

42)0 0ROTECTION
&IGURE  3YNCHRO CHECK ACROSS TRANSFORMER

6+

4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IN


#,/3% !2 6+ NORMALLY OPERATES IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE IN
TEGRATED AUTO RECLOSE AND MANUAL CLOSE FUNCTIONS
3YNC )T IS HOWEVER POSSIBLE TO OPERATE WITH AN EXTERNAL
5 AUTO RECLOSE RELAY )N THIS CASE THE SIGNAL EX
CHANGE BETWEEN THE DEVICES MUST BE PERFORMED
$ISCREPANCY ,
THROUGH BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
SWITCH

&URTHERMORE SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCH


ING IS POSSIBLE 3YNCHRONOUS SWITCHING MEANS THAT
THE CLOSING COMMAND IS GIVEN AS SOON AS THE CRITICAL
VALUES VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE —5 ANGLE DIF
FERENCE —„ AND FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F LIE WITHIN
THE SET TOLERANCES &OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING THE
DEVICE CALCULATES THE CORRECT TIMING OF THE CLOSING
&IGURE  3YNCHRO CHECK ON CLOSING

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

COMMAND FROM THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„ AND THE FRE  /PERATING MODES
QUENCY DIFFERENCE —F SUCH THAT THE VOLTAGES AT THE
BUS BAR AND THE FEEDER CIRCUIT ARE EXACTLY THE SAME 4HE CLOSING CHECK PROCEDURE CAN BE SELECTED FROM
AT THE INSTANT THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTACTS TOUCH
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS
&OR THAT PURPOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME
MUST BE PROGRAMMED INTO THE RELAY &OR SYNCHRO
39.#(2  2ELEASE AT SYNCHRONISM 4HAT IS
NOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING DIFFERENT FRE
WHEN THE CRITICAL VALUES —5 —„
QUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMITS CAN BE PROGRAMMED
AND —F LIE WITHIN THE SET LIMITS
4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION OPER
ATES ONLY WHEN IT IS REQUESTED TO DO SO 4HIS REQUEST 5 5  2ELEASE FOR ENERGIZED LINE 5
CAN COME FROM THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION AND DE ENERGIZED BUS BAR
FROM THE MANUAL CLOSING COMMAND OR FROM AN EXTER 5 
NAL AUTO RECLOSE RELAY BY BINARY INPUT
5 5  2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION GIVES PERMISSION FOR 5 AND ENERGIZED BUS BAR
PASSAGE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND 5 

/PTIONALLY A CLOSING COMMAND CAN BE GIVEN BY THE 5 5  2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE
SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 4HIS CAN CONTROL THE CLOS 5 AND DE ENERGIZED BUS
ING COIL OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR !2 CLOSING COM BAR 5 
MAND AND SYNCHRO CHECK CLOSING COMMAND CAN
BE CONNECTED IN SERIES /6%22)$%  2ELEASE WITHOUT ANY CHECK

4HE PERMISSION TIME WINDOW IS LIMITED BY AN ADJUST 4HE RELEASE CONDITIONS CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR AU
ABLE SYNCHRONOUS MONITORING TIME 7ITHIN THIS PERI TOMATIC AND FOR MANUAL CLOSING EG ONE CAN PERMIT
OD THE PROGRAMMED CONDITIONS MUST HAVE BEEN MANUAL CLOSING AT SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE WHILST
MET OTHERWISE CLOSING PERMISSION WILL NOT BE GIVEN BEFORE AN AUTO RECLOSE AT ONE LINE END ONLY FREE
! NEW SYNCHRO CHECK SEQUENCE REQUIRES A NEW RE DOM FROM VOLTAGE AND AT THE OTHER END ONLY SYN
QUEST CHRONISM WILL BE CHECKED

4HE RELAY INDICATES WHEN THE CONDITIONS FOR SYNCHRO %ACH OF THESE CONDITIONS CAN BE SWITCHED TO BE EF
NISM ARE NOT FULFILLED INDEPENDENT OF A MEASURING RE FECTIVE OR NOT EFFECTIVE COMBINATIONS ARE ALSO POSSI
QUEST IE WHEN THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE BLE EG RELEASE WHEN 5 5 OR 5 5 ARE
—5 THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F OR THE ANGLE DIFFER
SATISFIED  #OMBINATION OF /6%22)$% WITH OTHER PA
ENCE —„ EXCEED THE SET LIMITS ! PRECONDITION IS THAT
RAMETERS IS OF COURSE NOT MEANINGFUL
BOTH VOLTAGES ARE OF SUFFICIENT MAGNITUDE  6 

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 $EAD LINE SWITCHING  !SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING

&OR RELEASE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND TO ENERGIZE A &OR RELEASE OF A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING
VOLT FREE LINE FROM THE BUS BAR THE FOLLOWING CONDI CONDITIONS ARE CHECKED
TIONS ARE CHECKED
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE BELOW THE SET VALUE 5
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
)S THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE \i5i i5i\
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM WITHIN THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT —5
MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED )S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F F\ WITHIN THE
PERMISSIBLE DIFFERENCE —F BUT LARGER THAN —FSYNC
#ORRESPONDING CONDITIONS APPLY WHEN SWITCHING A
LIVE LINE ONTO A DEAD BUS BAR OR A DEAD LINE ONTO A 7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE DEVICE CALCU
DEAD BUS BAR LATES THE TIME TO THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM
FROM THE RATE OF CHANGE OF ANGLE AND FREQUENCY DIF
FERENCE 4HE CLOSING COMMAND IS THEN RELEASED AT
THE INSTANT THAT THE CLOSING TIME OF THE BREAKER
EQUALS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN INSTANT OF COMMAND
 3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM AND THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM 4HE DURATION OF
THE COMMAND IS ADJUSTABLE
4O RELEASE A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING CONDI
TIONS ARE CHECKED

$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5

$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5

)S THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE \i5i i5i\


WITHIN THE PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCE —5

)S THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE \„ „\ WITHIN THE PER


MISSIBLE TOLERANCE —„

)S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F F\ WITHIN THE


PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCE —F

7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM


MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

 !NCILLARY FUNCTIONS

4HE ANCILLARY FUNCTIONS OF THE NUMERICAL AUTO RECLO THEY CANNOT BE RESET UNTIL THE ORIGINATING CRITERION
SURE RELAY 6+ INCLUDE HAS BEEN REMOVED 4HIS MAINLY CONCERNS FAULT INDI
CATIONS SUCH AS AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAULT ETC
0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS
! GREEN ,%$ INDICATES READINESS FOR OPERATION 4HIS
3TORAGE OF MEASURED DATA FOR FAULT RECORDING ,%$ CANNOT BE RESET AND REMAINS ILLUMINATED WHEN
THE MICROPROCESSOR IS WORKING CORRECTLY AND THE UNIT
/PERATIONAL MEASUREMENTS AND TESTING ROUTINES IS NOT FAULTY 4HE ,%$ EXTINGUISHES WHEN THE SELF
CHECKING FUNCTION OF THE MICROPROCESSOR DETECTS A
-ONITORING FUNCTIONS FAULT OR WHEN THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE IS ABSENT

7ITH THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE PRESENT BUT WITH AN EXIST


ING INTERNAL FAULT IN THE UNIT A RED ,%$ ILLUMINATES
 "LOCKED AND BLOCKS THE UNIT
 0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS

!FTER A FAULT IN THE PROTECTED OBJECT INFORMATION CON  )NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO
CERNING THE RESPONSE OF THE DEVICE AND KNOWLEDGE A PERSONAL COMPUTER
OF THE MEASURED VALUES ARE OF IMPORTANCE FOR AN EX
ACT ANALYSIS OF THE HISTORY OF THE FAULT &OR THIS PUR %VENTS AND CONDITIONS CAN BE READ OFF IN THE DISPLAY
POSE THE DEVICE PROVIDES ANNUNCIATION PROCESSING ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE DEVICE !DDITIONALLY A PER
WHICH IS EFFECTIVE IN THREE DIRECTIONS SONAL COMPUTER FOR EXAMPLE CAN BE CONNECTED VIA
THE OPERATION INTERFACE AND ALL THE INFORMATIONS CAN
THEN BE SENT TO IT
 )NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS
SIGNAL RELAYS )N THE QUIESCENT STATE IE AS LONG AS NO NETWORK
FAULTS ARE PRESENT THE DISPLAY OUTPUTS SELECTABLE OP
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND CONDITIONS ARE INDICATED BY ERATING INFORMATION USUALLY AN OPERATIONAL MEA
OPTICAL INDICATORS ,%$ ON THE FRONT PLATE 4HE MOD SURED VALUE MODELS WITH SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE
ULE ALSO CONTAINS SIGNAL RELAYS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING CHECK IN EACH OF THE TWO LINES )N THE EVENT OF A NET
-OST OF THE SIGNALS AND INDICATIONS CAN BE MAR WORK FAULT SELECTABLE INFORMATION ON THE FAULT AP
SHALLED IE THEY CAN BE ALLOCATED MEANINGS OTHER PEARS INSTEAD OF THE OPERATING INFORMATION EG DE
THAN THE FACTORY SETTINGS )N 3ECTION  THE DELIVERED TECTED PHASES  4HE QUIESCENT INFORMATION IS DIS
CONDITION AND THE MARSHALLING FACILITIES ARE DE PLAYED AGAIN ONCE THESE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS HAVE
SCRIBED IN DETAIL BEEN ACKNOWLEDGED 4HE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IS
IDENTICAL TO RESETTING OF THE STORED ,%$ DISPLAYS AS IN
4HE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS ARE NOT LATCHED AND AUTO 3ECTION 
MATICALLY RESET AS SOON AS THE ORIGINATING SIGNAL DIS
APPEARS 4HE ,%$S CAN BE ARRANGED TO LATCH OR TO BE 4HE DEVICE ALSO HAS SEVERAL EVENT BUFFERS EG FOR
SELF RESETTING OPERATING MESSAGES CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STA
TISTICS ETC REFER TO 3ECTION  WHICH CAN BE SAVED
4HE MEMORIES OF THE ,%$S CAN BE SAFE AGAINST SUP AGAINST SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAILURE BY A BUFFER BATTERY
PLY VOLTAGE FAILURE 4HEY CAN BE RESET 4HESE MESSAGES AS WELL AS ALL AVAILABLE OPERATING
VALUES CAN BE TRANSFERRED INTO THE FRONT DISPLAY AT
LOCALLY BY OPERATION OF THE RESET BUTTON ON THE ANY TIME USING THE KEYBOARD OR TO THE PERSONAL COM
RELAY PUTER VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE

REMOTELY BY ENERGIZATION OF THE REMOTE RESET IN !FTER A FAULT FOR EXAMPLE IMPORTANT INFORMATION CON
PUT CERNING ITS HISTORY SUCH AS PICK UP AND TRIPPING
CAN BE CALLED UP ON THE DISPLAY OF THE DEVICE 4HE
AUTOMATICALLY ON OCCURRENCE OF A NEW GENERAL FAULT INCEPTION IS INDICATED WITH THE ABSOLUTE TIME OF
PICK UP SIGNAL THE OPERATING SYSTEM PROVIDED THIS FEATURE IS AVAIL
ABLE 4HE SEQUENCE OF THE EVENTS IS TAGGED WITH THE
3OME INDICATORS AND RELAYS INDICATE CONDITIONS IT IS RELATIVE TIME REFERRED TO THE MOMENT AT WHICH THE
NOT APPROPRIATE THAT THESE SHOULD BE STORED %QUALLY FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICKED UP 4HE RESOLUTION IS  MS

# ' # 


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

4HE EVENTS CAN ALSO BE READ OUT WITH A PERSONAL NALS 0ICK UP 4RIP AND $ROP OFF ARE MARKED
COMPUTER BY MEANS OF THE APPROPRIATE PROGRAM ON THE FAULT RECORD
$)'3)  4HIS PROVIDES THE COMFORT OF A #24 SCREEN
AND MENU GUIDED OPERATION !DDITIONALLY THE DATA !LTERNATIVELY THE FAULT RECORD DATA CAN BE TRANS
CAN BE DOCUMENTED ON A PRINTER OR STORED ON A MITTED TO A CONTROL CENTRE VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE )N
FLOPPY DISC FOR EVALUATION ELSEWHERE THIS CASE DATA ARE STORED FROM  PERIODS BEFORE TO 
PERIODS AFTER PICK UP OF THE DEVICE %VALUATION OF
4HE DEVICE STORES THE DATA OF THE LAST THREE NETWORK THE DATA IS MADE IN THE CONTROL CENTRE USING APPRO
FAULTS IF A FOURTH FAULT OCCURS THE OLDEST FAULT IS OVER PRIATE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS 4HE ARE REFERRED TO THEIR
WRITTEN IN THE FAULT MEMORY MAXIMUM VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VALUES
AND PREPARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDITION
! NETWORK FAULT BEGINS WITH RECOGNITION OF THE FAULT BY THE SIGNALS 0ICK UP 4RIP AND $ROP OFF ARE
PICK UP OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION AND ENDS WITH MARKED ON THE FAULT RECORD
DROP OFF OR EXPIRY OF THE AUTO RECLOSE SEQUENCE SO
THAT NON SUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS WILL 7HEN THE DATA ARE TRANSFERRED TO A CENTRAL UNIT
ALSO BE STORED AS PART OF ONE NETWORK FAULT 4HUS READ OUT CAN PROCEED AUTOMATICALLY OPTIONALLY AF
ONE NETWORK FAULT CAN INCLUDE DIFFERENT FAULT EVENTS TER EACH PICK UP OF THE RELAY OR AFTER AN INSTANTA
FROM PICK UP UNTIL DROP OFF  4HIS IS PARTICULARLY NEOUS TRIP 4HE FOLLOWING THEN APPLIES
ADVANTAGEOUS FOR ALLOCATION OF TIME DATA
4HE RELAY SIGNALS THE AVAILABILITY OF FAULT RECORD
DATA
 )NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT OPTIONAL
4HE DATA REMAIN AVAILABLE FOR RECALL UNTIL COM
)N ADDITION ALL STORED INFORMATION CAN BE TRANSMITTED MENCEMENT OF THE NEXT FAULT EVENT
VIA AN OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTOR TO A CONTROL CENTRE FOR
EXAMPLE THE 3)%-%.3 ,OCALIZED 3UBSTATION !UTO ! TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS CAN BE ABORTED BY THE
MATION 3YSTEM ,3!  4RANSMISSION USES A STAN CENTRAL UNIT
DARDIZED TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO $).


 /PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND


CONVERSION MODELS WITH SYNCHRO
 $ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION NISM CHECK
FOR FAULT RECORDING MODELS WITH
SYNCHRONISM CHECK &OR LOCAL RECALL OR TRANSMISSION OF DATA THE TRUE RMS
VALUES OF THE VOLTAGES IN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY VAL
4HE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES OF THE MEASURED VALUES UES THE FREQUENCIES THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFER
ENCE —5 THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F AND THE PHASE
U AND U ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„ ARE ALWAYS AVAILABLE AS LONG AS
THE VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
ARE SAMPLED AT  MS INTERVALS FOR  (Z AND STORED
IN A CIRCULATING SHIFT REGISTER )N CASE OF A FAULT THE 4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID
DATA FROM  CYCLES BEFORE PICK UP OF THE FEEDER PRO
TECTION UP UNTIL  CYCLES AFTER THE TRIP COMMAND ARE 5 THE FEEDER VOLTAGE IN VOLTS SECONDARY
STORED MAX OVER  SECONDS 4HESE DATA ARE THEN
AVAILABLE FOR FAULT ANALYSIS &OR EACH RENEWED NET 5 THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IN VOLTS SECONDARY
WORK FAULT THE ACTUAL NEW FAULT DATA ARE STORED WITH
5PRI THE FEEDER VOLTAGE IN KILOVOLTS PRIMARY
OUT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THE OLD DATA
5PRI THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IN KILOVOLTS PRIMARY
4HE DATA CAN BE TRANSFERRED TO A CONNECTED PERSONAL
COMPUTER VIA THE OPERATION INTERFACE AT THE FRONT AND F THE FREQUENCY OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE IN
EVALUATED BY THE PROTECTION DATA EVALUATION PROGRAM (ERTZ
$)'3)  4HE VOLTAGES ARE REFERRED TO THEIR MAXIMUM
VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VALUES AND PRE F THE FREQUENCY OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IN
PARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDITION THE SIG (ERTZ

 # ' #


6+ 6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION

—5 THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE ING EACH CHANNELS ONE AFTER THE OTHER AND CHECK
ING FOR CHANGE IN THE OUTPUT SIGNAL LEVEL #HANGE
—F THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE
OF THE FEED BACK SIGNAL TO LOW LEVEL INDICATES A
—„ THE PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE FAULT IN ONE OF THE CONTROL CHANNELS OR IN THE RELAY
COIL 3UCH A CONDITION LEADS AUTOMATICALLY TO
ALARM AND BLOCKING OF THE COMMAND OUTPUT

-EMORY MODULES

 -ONITORING FUNCTIONS 4HE MEMORY MODULES ARE PERIODICALLY CHECKED


FOR FAULT BY
4HE DEVICE INCORPORATES COMPREHENSIVE MONITORING
FUNCTIONS WHICH COVER BOTH HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE C 7RITING A DATA BIT PATTERN FOR THE WORKING
MEMORY 2!- AND READING IT

 (ARDWARE MONITORING C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS FOR THE PROGRAM


MEMORY %02/- AND COMPARISON OF IT WITH A
4HE COMPLETE HARDWARE IS MONITORED FOR FAULTS AND REFERENCE PROGRAM MODULUS STORED THERE
INADMISSIBLE FUNCTIONS FROM THE MEASURED VALUE IN
PUTS TO THE OUTPUT RELAYS )N DETAIL THIS IS ACCOM C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS OF THE VALUES STORED
PLISHED BY MONITORING IN THE PARAMETER STORE %%02/- THEN COM
PARING IT WITH THE NEWLY DETERMINED MODULUS AF
!UXILIARY AND REFERENCE VOLTAGES TER EACH PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT PROCESS

4HE PROCESSOR MONITORS THE OFFSET AND REFERENCE


VOLTAGE OF THE !$# ANALOGDIGITAL CONVERTER  4HE  3OFTWARE MONITORING
PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AS SOON AS IMPERMISSIBLE
DEVIATIONS OCCUR 0ERMANENT FAULTS ARE ANNUN &OR CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE PROGRAM SE
CIATED QUENCES A WATCHDOG TIMER IS PROVIDED WHICH WILL RE
SET THE PROCESSOR IN THE EVENT OF PROCESSOR FAILURE OR
&AILURE OR SWITCH OFF OF THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AUTO IF A PROGRAM FALLS OUT OF STEP &URTHER INTERNAL PLAUSI
MATICALLY PUTS THE SYSTEM OUT OF OPERATION THIS BILITY CHECKS ENSURE THAT ANY FAULT IN PROCESSING OF
STATUS IS INDICATED BY A FAIL SAFE CONTACT 4RAN THE PROGRAMS CAUSED BY INTERFERENCE WILL BE RECOG
SIENT DIPS IN SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF LESS THAN  MS WILL NIZED 3UCH FAULTS LEAD TO RESET AND RESTART OF THE PRO
NOT DISTURB THE FUNCTION OF THE RELAY CESSOR

#OMMAND OUTPUT CHANNELS )F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY RESTARTING FURTHER


RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER
4HE COMMAND RELAYS FOR CLOSING ARE CONTROLLED BY THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM WILL
TWO COMMAND AND ONE ADDITIONAL RELEASE CHAN SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDICATE THIS CONDITION
NELS !S LONG AS NO PICK UP CONDITION EXISTS THE BY DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY THUS INDICATING
CENTRAL PROCESSOR MAKES A CYCLIC CHECK OF THESE EQUIPMENT FAULT AND SIMULTANEOUSLY THE ,%$
COMMAND OUTPUT CHANNEL FOR AVAILABILITY BY EXCIT "LOCKED COMES ON

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 7ARNING
4HE SUCCESSFUL AND SAFE OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE IS DEPENDENT ON PROPER HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL UNDER OBSERVANCE OF ALL WARNINGS AND HINTS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL

)N PARTICULAR THE GENERAL ERECTION AND SAFETY REGULATIONS EG )%# $). 6$% OR NATIONAL STANDARDS
REGARDING THE CORRECT USE OF HOISTING GEAR MUST BE OBSERVED .ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN DEATH
PERSONAL INJURY OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE

 5NPACKING AND REPACKING  0REPARATIONS

7HEN DISPATCHED FROM THE FACTORY THE EQUIPMENT IS 4HE OPERATING CONDITIONS MUST ACCORD WITH 6$%
PACKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GUIDELINES LAID DOWN  AND 6$%  PART  OR CORRESPOND
IN )%#   WHICH SPECIFIES THE IMPACT RESIS ING NATIONAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLA
TANCE OF PACKAGING TIONS

4HIS PACKING SHALL BE REMOVED WITH CARE WITHOUT


 #AUTION
FORCE AND WITHOUT THE USE OF INAPPROPRIATE TOOLS 4HE
EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE VISUALLY CHECKED TO ENSURE 4HE MODULES OF DIGITAL RELAYS CONTAIN
THAT THERE ARE NO EXTERNAL TRACES OF DAMAGE #-/3 CIRCUITS 4HESE SHALL NOT BE WITH
DRAWN OR INSERTED UNDER LIVE CONDITIONS
4HE TRANSPORT PACKING CAN BE RE USED FOR FURTHER 4HE MODULES MUST BE SO HANDLED THAT ANY
TRANSPORT WHEN APPLIED IN THE SAME WAY 4HE STOR POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE DUE TO STATIC ELECTRI
AGE PACKING OF THE INDIVIDUAL RELAYS IS NOT SUITED TO CAL CHARGES IS EXCLUDED $URING ANY NECES
TRANSPORT )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS USED THIS MUST SARY HANDLING OF INDIVIDUAL MODULES THE RE
COMMENDATIONS RELATING TO THE HANDLING OF
ALSO PROVIDE THE SAME DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST
ELECTROSTATICALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS
MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%#   
%%# MUST BE OBSERVED
CLASS  AND )%#    CLASS 
)N INSTALLED CONDITIONS THE MODULES ARE IN NO DAN
"EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE GER
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
LEAST TWO HOURS IN ORDER TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE
EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS  #HECKING THE RATED DATA

 -ODEL 6+J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SUR 4HE RATED DATA OF THE UNIT MUST BE CHECKED AGAINST
FACE MOUNTING THE PLANT DATA 4HIS APPLIES IN PARTICULAR TO THE RATED
DC VOLTAGE OF THE SUBSTATION BATTERY
3ECURE THE UNIT WITH FOUR SCREWS TO THE PANEL &OR
THE DIMENSIONS REFER TO &IGURE 

#ONNECT THE EARTHING TERMINAL 4ERMINAL  OF THE  #ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS
UNIT TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL
7HEN DELIVERED FROM THE FACTORY THE BINARY INPUTS
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTANCE ARE DESIGNED TO OPERATE IN THE TOTAL CONTROL VOLTAGE
OPERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTH RANGE FROM  6 TO  6 )F THE RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE
ING SURFACE AT THE SIDE OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE FOR THE BINARY INPUTS IS  6 OR HIGHER IT IS ADVISABLE
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY TO SELECT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD TO THESE INPUTS
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL RECOMMENDED GROUNDING TO INCREASE STABILITY AGAINST STRAY VOLTAGES IN THE DC
STRAP $).  FORM ! EG /RDER .O  OF CIRCUITS
-ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ERMANY
4O SELECT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD OF APPROXI
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREWED TERMINALS MATELY  6 FOR A BINARY INPUT A SOLDER BRIDGE MUST
BE REMOVED &IGURE  SHOWS THE ALLOCATION OF
THESE SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ")  TO ")  AND
THEIR LOCATION ON THE BASIC PCB OF THE MODULE
 -ODEL 6+J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH %03  &IGURE  SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THESE
MOUNTING OR J%JJJ FOR CUBICLE INSTALLA SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ")  TO ")  AND THEIR
LOCATION ON THE ADDITIONAL PCB %!:  OF THE
TION
MODULE
,IFT UP BOTH LABELLING STRIPS ON THE LID OF THE UNIT /PEN HOUSING COVER
AND REMOVE COVER TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE FOUR HOLES
FOR THE FIXING SCREWS ,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM
)NSERT THE UNIT INTO THE PANEL CUT OUT AND SECURE IT
WITH THE FIXING SCREWS &OR THE DIMENSIONS REFER TO
&IGURE  #AUTION

#ONNECT THE EARTHING SCREW ON THE REAR OF THE UNIT %LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTANCE AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
OPERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTH VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
ING SURFACE AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE FACE
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE RECOMMENDED 0ULL OUT MODULE AND PLACE ONTO A CONDUCTIVE SUR
GROUNDING STRAP $).  FORM ! EG /RDER FACE
.O  OF -ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ER
MANY #HECK THE SOLDER BRIDGES ACCORDING TO &IGURE 
AND  REMOVE BRIDGES WHERE NECESSARY
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA THE SCREWED OR SNAP IN
TERMINALS OF THE SOCKETS OF THE HOUSING /BSERVE )NSERT MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT THE RE
LABELLING OF THE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTOR MODULES TO LEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE RIGHT BEFORE THE
ENSURE CORRECT LOCATION OBSERVE THE MAX PERMIS MODULE IS PRESSED IN
SIBLE CONDUCTOR CROSS SECTIONS 4HE USE OF THE
SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN &IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS AND MUST NOT BE VER
USED FOR FIELD WIRING UNLESS PROPER STRAIN RELIEF AND
THE PERMISSIBLE BENDING RADIUS ARE OBSERVED #LOSE HOUSING COVER

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

"INARY INPUT  "INARY INPUT  3OL "INARY INPUT  3OL "INARY INPUT  3OL
3OLDER BRIDGE 7 DER BRIDGE 7 DER BRIDGE 7 DER BRIDGE 7

"INARY INPUT  3OL


DER BRIDGE 7

"INARY INPUT  3OL


DER BRIDGE 7

&OR RATED VOLTAGES  6DC 3OLDER BRIDGES MUST BE FITTED

&OR RATED VOLTAGES  6DC 3OLDER BRIDGES MAY BE


REMOVED #UT AND BEND ASIDE

&IGURE  #HECKING OF CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS  TO 

"INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

"INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

"INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT  3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT   3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT   3OLDER BRIDGE 7

7 "INARY INPUT   3OLDER BRIDGE


7

7

&OR RATED VOLTAGES  6  3OLDER BRIDGES


7
MUST BE FITTED

&OR RATED VOLTAGES  6  3OLDER


7
BRIDGES MAY BE REMOVED

&IGURE  #HECKING OF CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS  TO 

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 #HECKING THE ,3! DATA TRANSMISSION LINK

&OR MODELS WITH AN INTERFACE FOR A CENTRAL DATA PRO 4HE NORMAL SIGNAL POSITION FOR THE DATA TRANSMISSION
CESSING STATION EG ,3! THESE CONNECTIONS MUST IS FACTORY PRESET AS LIGHT OFF  4HIS CAN BE CHANGED
ALSO BE CHECKED )T IS IMPORTANT TO VISUALLY CHECK THE BY MEANS OF A JUMPER PLUG 8 WHICH IS ACCESSIBLE
ALLOCATION OF THE TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER CHANNELS WHEN THE PLUG IN MODULE IS REMOVED FROM THE CASE
3INCE EACH CONNECTION IS USED FOR ONE TRANSMISSION 4HE JUMPER IS SITUATED IN THE REAR AREA OF THE #05
DIRECTION THE TRANSMIT CONNECTION OF THE RELAY MUST BOARD %03  BETWEEN THE CONNECTOR MODULES
BE CONNECTED TO THE RECEIVE CONNECTION OF THE CEN &IGURE  
TRAL UNIT AND VICE VERSA

4RANSMISSION VIA OPTICAL FIBRE IS PARTICULARLY INSENSI


TIVE AGAINST DISTURBANCES AND AUTOMATICALLY PRO *UMPER 0OSITION .ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION
VIDES GALVANIC ISOLATION 4RANSMIT AND RECEIVE CON
8   ,IGHT OFF
NECTORS ARE DESIGNATED WITH THE SYMBOLS FOR 8   ,IGHT ON
TRANSMIT OUTPUT AND FOR RECEIVE INPUT

*UMPER 8 8 AT DELIVERY

6 

2 6

8 8
$
2

&IGURE  0OSITION OF THE JUMPER 8 ON THE #05 BOARD %03 

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 #ONNECTIONS C )S THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS


FORMERS CORRECT
'ENERAL AND CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ARE SHOWN IN !P
PENDIX ! AND " 4HE MARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES OF THE )F TEST SWITCHES HAVE BEEN FITTED IN THE SECONDARY
BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION CIRCUITS CHECK THEIR FUNCTION

&IT A DC AMMETER IN THE AUXILIARY POWER CIRCUIT
RANGE APPROX  ! TO  !

#LOSE THE BATTERY SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER CHECK


POLARITY AND MAGNITUDE OF THE VOLTAGE AT THE TERMI
NALS OF THE UNIT OR AT THE CONNECTOR MODULE
 #HECKING THE CONNECTIONS 4HE MEASURED CURRENT CONSUMPTION SHOULD BE
CORRESPOND TO APPROXIMATELY  7 4RANSIENT
MOVEMENT OF THE AMMETER POINTER ONLY INDICATES
THE CHARGING CURRENT OF THE STORAGE CAPACITORS
 7ARNING
3OME OF THE FOLLOWING TEST STEPS ARE CARRIED 4HE UNIT STARTS UP AND ON COMPLETION OF THE RUN
OUT IN THE PRESENCE OF HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES UP PERIOD THE GREEN ,%$ ON THE FRONT COMES ON
4HEY SHALL BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PER THE RED ,%$ GETS OFF AFTER AT LAST  SEC
SONNEL ONLY WHICH IS THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR
WITH ALL SAFETY REGULATIONS AND PRECAUTION /PEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE DC POWER SUPPLY
ARY MEASURES AND PAY DUE ATTENTION TO
THESE 2EMOVE DC AMMETER RECONNECT THE AUXILIARY
.ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN SEVERE PER VOLTAGE LEADS
SONAL INJURY
#LOSE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB SECONDARY
"EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE CIRCUIT 
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
LEAST TWO HOURS IN ORDER TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE #HECK THE DIRECTION OF THE VOLTAGES AT THE RELAY TER
EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND MINALS
CONDENSATION
/PEN THE MCB S FOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SEC
3WITCH OFF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR THE DC SUPPLY ONDARY CIRCUITS AND DC POWER SUPPLY
AND THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
#HECK THROUGH THE CLOSING CIRCUITS TO THE CIRCUIT
#HECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER BREAKER
CIRCUITS AGAINST THE PLANT AND CONNECTION DIA
GRAMS #HECK THROUGH THE CONTROL WIRING TO AND FROM OTH
ER DEVICES
C !RE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS CORRECTLY EARTHED
#HECK THE SIGNAL CIRCUITS
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIR
CUITS CORRECT #LOSE THE PROTECTIVE MCB S

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 #ONFIGURATION OF OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

 /PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS

&OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS
WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE FUNCTIONS 
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON
CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE 4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR OPERATION LANGUAGE READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
,3! CONFIGURATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION
4O INDICATE AUTHORIZED OPERATOR USE PRESS KEY #7
ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF ANNUNCIATION SIGNALS ENTER THE SIX FIGURE CODE       AND CONFIRM
BINARY INPUTS OPTICAL INDICATIONS WITH % #ODEWORD ENTRY CAN ALSO BE MADE RETRO
SPECTIVELY AFTER PAGING OR DIRECT ADDRESSING TO ANY
SETTING ADDRESS

% . 4 % 2 # / $ % 7 / 2 $  4HE ENTERED CHARACTERS DO NOT APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY


INSTEAD ONLY A SYMBOL APPEARS !FTER CONFIRMATION OF
THE CORRECT INPUT WITH % THE DISPLAY RESPONDS WITH #7
# 7 ! # # % 0 4 % $ !##%04%$ 0RESS THE ENTRY KEY % AGAIN

)F THE CODEWORD IS NOT CORRECT THE DISPLAY SHOWS


# / $ % 7 / 2 $ 7 2 / . ' #/$%7/2$ 72/.' 0RESSING THE #7 KEY ALLOWS
ANOTHER ATTEMPT AT CODEWORD ENTRY

 3ETTINGS FOR OPERATING PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCK 

/PERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE SET IN ADDRESS BLOCK THEN APPEARS AS SHOWN IN THE BOXES BELOW 4HE
 4HIS BLOCK ALLOWS THE OPERATOR LANGUAGE TO BE CHOSEN ALTERNATIVE MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH ENTER
CHANGED 4HE TRANSMISSION SPEED FOR TRANSFER OF KEY %
DATA TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER CAN BE MATCHED TO THE
INTERFACE OF THE 0# MESSAGES ON THE FRONT DISPLAY 7HEN THE RELAY IS DELIVERED FROM THE FACTORY THE DE
CAN BE SELECTED HERE FOR THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE VICE IS PROGRAMMED TO GIVE FUNCTION NAMES AND OUT
UNIT OR AFTER A FAULT EVENT 4O CHANGE ANY OF THESE PA PUTS IN THE 'ERMAN LANGUAGE 4HIS CAN BE CHANGED
RAMETERS CODEWORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY UNDER ADDRESS  4HE OPERATOR LANGUAGES AVAIL
ABLE AT PRESENT ARE SHOWN IN THE BOXES BELOW
4HE SIMPLEST WAY OF ARRIVING AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS
CONFIGURATION BLOCK IS TO USE KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE 4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
ADDRESS NUMBER     AND %.4%2 KEY % 4HE AD THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
DRESS  APPEARS SEE BELOW  +EY ! WILL TAKE THE KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
OPERATOR TO ADDRESS  THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3  #ONFIRM
WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
IE BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER 4HE TITLE OF THE RE STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL
QUESTED PARAMETER APPEARS BEHIND THE BAR SEE BE
TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
LOW  4HE SECOND LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE TEXT
CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
APPLICABLE TO THE PARAMETER 4HE PRESENT TEXT CAN BE
CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
REJECTED BY THE .O KEY . 4HE NEXT TEXT CHOICE

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU 7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA
RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS  TO  WITH KEYS RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN BUFFER
Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& STORES ARE PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%02/-S AND
#/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/.   0RESS THE .O KEY PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE )F CONFIGURATION PA
. TO CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE RAMETERS HAVE BEEN CHANGED THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS WILL RESET AND RE START $URING RE START THE DEVICE IS
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3   .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM NOT OPERATIONAL
WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE

    / 0 % 2 ! 4 ) . '
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATING PARAMETERS
0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 3

4HE AVAILABLE LANGUAGES CAN BE CALLED UP BY REPEATEDLY


    , ! . ' 5 ! ' %
PRESSING THE .O KEY . %ACH LANGUAGE IS SPELLED IN
$ % 5 4 3 # ( THE CORRESPONDING COUNTRY S LANGUAGE )F YOU DON T UN
DERSTAND A LANGUAGE YOU SHOULD FIND YOUR OWN LAN
% . ' , ) 3 ( GUAGE

4HE REQUIRED LANGUAGE IS CHOSEN WITH THE ENTER KEY %

    / 0 % 2  " ! 5 $ 2  4HE TRANSMISSION "AUD RATE FOR COMMUNICATION VIA THE


OPERATING INTERFACE AT THE FRONT CAN BE ADAPTED TO THE OP
    " ! 5 $ ERATOR S COMMUNICATION INTERFACE EG PERSONAL COM
PUTER IF NECESSARY 4HE AVAILABLE POSSIBILITIES CAN BE DIS
    " ! 5 $ PLAYED BY REPEATEDLY DEPRESSION OF THE .O KEY .
#ONFIRM THE DESIRED "AUD RATE WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
    " ! 5 $
.OTE &OR OPERATOR PANEL 82 THE OPERATION "AUD
RATE MUST BE  "!5$
    " ! 5 $

     " ! 5 $

4HE DATE IN THE DISPLAY IS PRESET TO THE %UROPEAN FORMAT


    $ ! 4 % & / 2 - ! 4
$AY-ONTH9EAR 3WITCH OVER TO THE !MERICAN FORMAT
$ $  - -  9 9 9 9 -ONTH$AY9EAR IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING THE
.O KEY . THEN CONFIRM WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
- -  $ $  9 9 9 9 $$ TWO FIGURES FOR THE DAY
-- TWO FIGURES FOR THE MONTH
9999 FOUR FIGURES FOR THE YEAR INCL CENTURY

    & ! 5 , 4 ) . $ ) # 3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS AND THE FAULT EVENT MESSAGES IN


THE DISPLAY CAN BE DISPLAYED EITHER WITH EACH FAULT DE
7 ) 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # TECTION OR ONLY AFTER TRIP COMMAND IS GIVEN 4HIS MODE
CAN BE CHANGED BY DEPRESSING THE .O KEY . AND
7 ) 4 ( 4 2 ) 0 # / - -  CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

    / 0 % 2   S T , -ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ST DISPLAY LINE DURING


5   OPERATION !NY OF THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES AC
CORDING TO 3ECTION  CAN BE SELECTED AS MESSAGES
IN THE THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE RELAY BY REPEATEDLY DE
5   PRESSING THE .O KEY . 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE
ENTRY KEY % UNDER ADDRESS  WILL APPEAR IN THE FIRST
ETC LINE OF THE DISPLAY

    / 0 % 2   N D , -ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ND DISPLAY LINE DURING


5   OPERATION 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE ENTRY KEY % UNDER
ADDRESS  WILL APPEAR IN THE SECOND LINE OF THE DIS
PLAY
ETC

&AULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE DISPLAYED AFTER A ARE ACKNOWLEDGED DURING OPERATION WITH THE 2%3%4
FAULT ON THE FRONT 4HESE CAN BE CHOSEN UNDER AD KEY OR VIA THE REMOTE RESET INPUT OF THE DEVICE !FTER
DRESSES  AND  4HE POSSIBLE MESSAGES ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE OPERATIONAL MESSAGES OF THE
CAN BE SELECTED BY REPEATEDLY PRESSING THE QUIESCENT STATE WILL BE DISPLAYED AGAIN AS CHOSEN
.O KEY . 4HE DESIRED MESSAGE IS CONFIRMED UNDER ADDRESSES  AND 
WITH THE ENTER KEY % 4HESE SPONTANEOUS MESSAGES

!FTER A FAULT EVENT THE FIRST LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS


    & ! 5 , 4  S T ,
! 2 ) N I T 4 Y P E TYPE OF !2 INITIATION FAULTY PHASES

! 2 # L O S E 4 Y P E TYPE OF CLOSING COMMAND SINGLE OR THREE POLE

    & ! 5 , 4  N D , !FTER A FAULT EVENT THE SECOND LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS
! 2 # L O S E 4 Y P E
THE POSSIBILITIES ARE THE SAME AS UNDER ADDRESS 
ETC

)DENTIFICATION NUMBER OF THE RELAY WITHIN THE SUBSTATION


    $ % 6 ) # % ! $ $  VALID FOR BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND ,3!
 INTERFACE  4HE NUMBER CAN BE CHOSEN AT LIBERTY BUT
MUST BE USED ONLY ONCE WITHIN THE PLANT SYSTEM
3MALLEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER 
,ARGEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER 

    & % % $ % 2 ! $ $  .UMBER OF THE FEEDER WITHIN THE SUBSTATION VALID FOR


BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND ,3! INTERFACE
 3MALLEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER 
,ARGEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER 

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 #ONFIGURATION OF THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS

 )NTRODUCTION

4HE DEVICE 6+ IS CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A SERIES CIATED TEXT EG %8)34  )F THIS TEXT IS APPROPRIATE
OF FUNCTIONS 4HE SCOPE OF THE HARD AND FIRM THE ARROW KEYS ! OR " CAN BE USED TO PAGE THE NEXT
WARE IS MATCHED TO THESE FUNCTIONS &URTHERMORE IN ADDRESS )F THE TEXT SHOULD BE ALTERED PRESS THE
DIVIDUAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE SET CONFIGURED TO BE EF .O KEY . AN ALTERNATIVE TEXT THEN APPEARS EG
FECTIVE OR NON EFFECTIVE OR THE INTERACTION OF THE ./. %8)34  4HERE MAY BE OTHER ALTERNATIVES
FUNCTIONS CAN BE MODIFIED BY CONFIGURATION PARAME WHICH CAN THEN BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATED DEPRES
TERS !DDITIONALLY THE RELAY CAN BE ADAPTED TO THE SION OF THE .O KEY . 4HE REQUIRED ALTERNATIVE
SYSTEM FREQUENCY MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE KEY %

4HE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ARE INPUT THROUGH THE 4HE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
INTEGRATED OPERATION KEYBOARD AT THE FRONT OF THE DE TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
VICE OR BY MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER CONNECTED FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
TO THIS FRONT INTERFACE 4HE USE OF THE INTEGRATED OP PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3  
ERATING KEYBOARD IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION #ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SET
 !LTERATION OF THE PROGRAMMED PARAMETERS RE TINGS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
QUIRES THE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD SEE 3ECTION   .O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
7ITHOUT CODEWORD THE SETTING CAN BE READ OUT BUT ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
NOT ALTERED CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
&OR THE PURPOSE OF CONFIGURATION ADDRESSES JJ TIVE
ARE PROVIDED /NE CAN ACCESS THE BEGINNING OF THE
CONFIGURATION BLOCKS EITHER BY DIRECT DIAL )F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU
RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS  TO  WITH KEYS
PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /&
TYPE IN ADDRESS     #/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/.   0RESS THE .O KEY
PRESS EXECUTE KEY %  . TO CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE
9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS
OR BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3   .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM
WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS  APPEARS WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS DESCRIBED ABOVE

7ITHIN THE BOCK  ONE CAN PAGE FORWARD WITH ! OR 7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA
BACK WITH " %ACH PAGING ACTION LEADS TO A FURTHER RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN VOLA
ADDRESS FOR THE INPUT OF A CONFIGURATION PARAMETER )N TILE MEMORIES ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS SHOWN IN A 02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE 4HE
BOX AND EXPLAINED )N THE UPPER LINE OF THE DISPLAY PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $URING
BEHIND THE NUMBER AND THE BAR STANDS THE ASSO RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL
CIATED DEVICE FUNCTION )N THE SECOND LINE IS THE ASSO

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS CAN BE PROGRAMMED AS EX FUNCTION MEANS THAT THE FUNCTION WILL BE PROCESSED
ISTING OR NOT EXISTING &OR SOME FUNCTIONS IT MAY ALSO THAT INDICATION WILL APPEAR EG  SWITCHED OFF BUT
BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT BETWEEN MULTIPLE ALTERNATIVES THAT THE FUNCTION WILL HAVE NO EFFECT ON THE RESULT OF
THE PROTECTIVE PROCESS EG NO COMMAND 
&UNCTIONS WHICH ARE CONFIGURED AS ./. %8)34 WILL
NOT BE PROCESSED IN 6+ 4HERE WILL BE NO ANNUN 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW THE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE
CIATIONS AND THE ASSOCIATED SETTING PARAMETERS MAXIMUM SCOPE OF THE DEVICE )N AN ACTUAL CASE
FUNCTIONS LIMIT VALUES WILL NOT BE REQUESTED DURING FUNCTIONS WHICH ARE NOT AVAILABLE WILL NOT APPEAR IN
SETTING 3ECTION   )N CONTRAST SWITCH OFF OF A THE DISPLAY

    3 # / 0 % / & "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS


& 5 . # 4 ) / . 3

    & ! 5 , 4 2 % # 2 $     , 3 !
% 8 ) 3 4 . / . % 8 ) 3 4

. / . % 8 ) 3 4 % 8 ) 3 4

    ) . 4 % 2 . ! , ! 2     0 ! 2 ! -  #  /
% 8 ) 3 4 . / . % 8 ) 3 4

. / . % 8 ) 3 4 % 8 ) 3 4

    3 9 . # (  # ( % # +
. / . % 8 ) 3 4

% 8 ) 3 4

4HE RATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY MUST COMPLY WITH THE SETTING UNDER ADDRESS  )F THE SYSTEM FREQUENCY IS NOT
 (Z ADDRESS  MUST BE CHANGED

    & 2 % 1 5 % . # 9
2ATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY  (Z OR  (Z
F .   ( Z

F .   ( Z

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS

 )NTRODUCTION

4HE FUNCTIONS OF THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS REPRE MODULE AND SHOULD INITIATE A LOGICAL FUNCTION
SENTED IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS !PPENDIX ! RELATE NAMELY INITIATING 4HE CORRESPONDING QUESTION TO THE
TO THE FACTORY SETTINGS 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE INPUTS OPERATOR IS THEN 7HICH SIGNAL FROM A PHYSICAL IN
AND OUTPUTS OF THE INTERNAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE REAR PUT RELAY SHOULD INITIATE WHICH REACTION IN THE DE
RANGED AND THUS ADAPTED TO THE ON SITE CONDITIONS VICE /NE PHYSICAL INPUT SIGNAL CAN INITIATE UP TO 
LOGICAL FUNCTIONS
-ARSHALLING OF THE INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IS PER
FORMED BY MEANS OF THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR 4HE TRIP RELAYS CAN ALSO BE ASSIGNED DIFFERENT FUNC
VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT 4HE OPERATION TIONS %ACH TRIP RELAY CAN BE CONTROLLED BY EACH COM
OF THE OPERATOR PANEL IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION MAND FUNCTION OR COMBINATION OF COMMAND FUNC
 -ARSHALLING BEGINS AT THE PARAMETER ADDRESS TIONS

4HE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED IN
4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS REQUIRED FOR MARSHAL MULTIPLE MANNER %G ONE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
LING REFER TO 3ECTION   7ITHOUT CODEWORD ENTRY TRIGGER SEVERAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEVERAL TRIP RELAYS ADDI
PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE CHANGED TIONALLY BE INDICATED BY ,%$S AND BE CONTROLLED BY A
$URING CODEWORD OPERATION IE FROM CODEWORD BINARY INPUT UNIT 4HE RESTRICTION IS THAT THE TOTAL OF ALL
ENTRY UNTIL THE TERMINATION OF THE CONFIGURATION PROCE PHYSICAL INPUTOUTPUT UNITS BINARY INPUTS PLUS SIGNAL
DURE THE SOLID BAR IN THE DISPLAY FLASHES RELAYS PLUS ,%$S PLUS TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE TO BE AS
SOCIATED WITH ONE LOGICAL FUNCTION MUST NOT EXCEED A
7HEN THE FIRMWARE PROGRAMS ARE RUNNING THE SPECIF NUMBER OF  )F THIS NUMBER IS TRIED TO BE EXCEEDED
IC LOGIC FUNCTIONS WILL BE ALLOCATED TO THE PHYSICAL IN THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW A CORRESPONDING MESSAGE
PUT AND OUTPUT MODULES OR ,%$S IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE SELECTION 4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE IS SET UP SUCH THAT FOR
EACH PHYSICAL BINARY INPUT EACH OUTPUT RELAY AND
%XAMPLE #LOSING COMMAND IS PRODUCED 4HIS FOR EACH MARSHALLABLE ,%$ THE OPERATOR WILL BE
EVENT IS GENERATED IN THE DEVICE AS AN !NNUNCI ASKED WHICH LOGICAL FUNCTION SHOULD BE ALLOCATED
ATION LOGICAL FUNCTION AND SHOULD BE AVAILABLE AT
CERTAIN TERMINALS OF THE UNIT AS A ./ CONTACT 3INCE 4HE OFFERED LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE TABULATED FOR THE
SPECIFIC UNIT TERMINALS ARE HARD WIRED TO A SPECIFIC BINARY INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IN THE FOLLOWING SEC
PHYSICAL OUTPUT RELAY EG TO THE TRIP RELAY  THE TIONS
PROCESSOR MUST BE ADVISED THAT THE LOGICAL SIGNAL
!2 #LOSE #MD SHOULD BE TRANSMITTED TO THE TRIP 4HE BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING PARAMETER BLOCKS
RELAY  4HUS WHEN MARSHALLING IS PERFORMED TWO IS REACHED BY DIRECTLY SELECTING THE ADDRESS 
STATEMENTS OF THE OPERATOR ARE IMPORTANT 7HICH IE
LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION GENERATED IN THE PROTECTION
UNIT PROGRAM SHOULD TRIGGER WHICH PHYSICAL OUTPUT PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
RELAY 5P TO  LOGICAL ANNUNCIATIONS CAN TRIGGER ONE ENTER ADDRESS    
PHYSICAL OUTPUT RELAY PRESS ENTER KEY %

! SIMILAR SITUATION APPLIES TO BINARY INPUTS )N THIS OR BY PAGING WITH KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK
CASE EXTERNAL INFORMATION EG 4RIP BY FEEDER PRO WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS  HAS BEEN REACHED 4HE
TECTION IS CONNECTED TO THE UNIT VIA A PHYSICAL INPUT BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS THEN APPEARS

    "EGINNING OF MARSHALLING BLOCKS


- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

/NE CAN PROCEED THROUGH THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS KEY % )MMEDIATELY THE ASSOCIATED IDENTIFICATION OF
WITH THE KEY Å OR GO BACK WITH THE KEY Ç 7ITHIN A THE FUNCTION APPEARS FOR CHECKING PURPOSES 4HIS
BLOCK ONE GOES FORWARDS WITH ! OR BACKWARDS WITH CAN BE ALTERED EITHER BY ENTERING ANOTHER FUNCTION
" %ACH FORWARD OR BACKWARD STEP LEADS TO DISPLAY OF NUMBER OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE FUNC
THE NEXT INPUT OUTPUT OR ,%$ POSITION )N THE DISPLAY TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
BEHIND THE ADDRESS AND THE SOLID BAR THE PHYSICAL WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 )F THE FUNCTION HAS BEEN
INPUTOUTPUT UNIT FORMS THE HEADING CHANGED ANOTHER CONFIRMATION IS NECESSARY WITH
THE EXECUTE KEY %
4HE KEY COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNC
TION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY ! SWITCHES OVER )N THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS ALLOCATION POSSIBILITIES
TO THE SELECTION LEVEL FOR THE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS TO BE AL FOR BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS
LOCATED $URING THIS CHANGE OVER IE FROM PRESS ARE GIVEN 4HE ARROWS uv OR !" AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF
ING THE & KEY UNTIL PRESSING THE ! KEY THE BAR BEHIND THE DISPLAY BOX INDICATE PAGING FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK
THE ADDRESS NUMBER IS REPLACED BY AN &  4HE DIS WITHIN THE BLOCK OR ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 4HE CHARAC
PLAY SHOWS IN THE UPPER LINE THE PHYSICAL INPUTOUT TER & BEFORE THE ARROW INDICATES THAT THE FUNCTION KEY
PUT UNIT THIS TIME WITH A THREE DIGIT INDEX NUMBER & MUST BE PRESSED BEFORE PUSHING THE ARROW KEY !
4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS THE LOGICAL FUNCTION
WHICH IS PRESENTLY ALLOCATED 4HE FUNCTION NUMBERS AND DESIGNATIONS ARE LISTED
COMPLETELY IN !PPENDIX #
/N THIS SELECTION LEVEL THE ALLOCATED FUNCTION CAN BE
CHANGED BY PRESSING THE .O KEY . "Y REPEATED 4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
USE OF THE KEY . ALL MARSHALLABLE FUNCTIONS CAN BE TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
PAGED THROUGH THE DISPLAY "ACK PAGING IS POSSI FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
BLE WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 7HEN THE REQUIRED PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 
FUNCTION APPEARS PRESS THE EXECUTE KEY % !FTER THIS #ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW ALLOCA
FURTHER FUNCTIONS CAN BE ALLOCATED TO THE SAME PHYSI TIONS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
CAL INPUT OR OUTPUT MODULE WITH FURTHER INDEX NUM .O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
BERS BY USING THE KEY ! %ACH SELECTION MUST BE ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
CONFIRMED BY PRESSING THE KEY % )F A SELECTION CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
PLACE SHALL NOT BE ASSIGNED TO A FUNCTION SELECTION IS 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
MADE WITH THE FUNCTION NOT ALLOCATED  TIVE

9OU CAN LEAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL BY PRESSING THE KEY )F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU
COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS  TO  WITH KEYS
FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY !  4HE DISPLAY SHOWS Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /&
AGAIN THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER OF THE PHYSICAL #/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/.   0RESS THE .O KEY
INPUTOUTPUT MODULE .OW YOU CAN PAGE WITH KEY ! . TO CONTINUE MARSHALLING )F YOU PRESS THE
TO THE NEXT INPUTOUTPUT MODULE OR WITH " TO THE PRE 9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS
VIOUS TO REPEAT SELECTION PROCEDURE AS ABOVE 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3   .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM
WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
4HE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO PROVIDED WITH FUNCTION
NUMBERS WHICH ARE EQUALLY LISTED IN THE TABLES )F THE 7HEN ONE EXITS THE MARSHALLING PROGRAM THE ALTERED
FUNCTION NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS CAN BE INPUT DIRECTLY PARAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN
ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 0AGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN
FUNCTIONS IS THEN SUPERFLUOUS 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE %%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE
FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZEROS NEED NOT BE ENTERED 4HE PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $UR
!FTER INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER USE THE EXECUTE ING RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE UNIT CONTAINS  BINARY INPUTS WHICH ARE DESIG RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT  DE CONFI
NATED ).054  TO ).054  4HEY CAN BE MARSHALLED GURED REFER TO 3ECTION  
IN ADDRESS BLOCK  4HE ADDRESS BLOCK IS REACHED
BY PAGING IN BLOCKS Å Ç OR BY DIRECT ADDRESSING WITH 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZER
$!     % 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT OS NEED NOT BE USED 4O INDICATE THE CONTACT MODE
AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION  THE FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
POINT FOLLOWED BY  OR  WHEREBY
! CHOICE CAN BE MADE FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL INPUT FUNC
TION AS TO WHETHER THE DESIRED FUNCTION SHOULD BE  MEANS NORMALLY OPEN MODE CORRESPONDS TO
COME OPERATIVE IN THE NORMALLY OPEN MODE OR IN ./ AS ABOVE
THE NORMALLY CLOSED MODE WHEREBY
 MEANS NORMALLY CLOSED MODE CORRESPONDS TO
./ NORMALLY OPEN MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A ./ .# AS ABOVE
CONTACT IE THE CONTROL VOLTAGE AT THE INPUT
TERMINALS ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION )F THE EXTENSION WITH  OR  IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY FIRST
INDICATES THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN NORMALLY
.# NORMALLY CLOSED MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A
OPEN MODE ./ "Y PRESSING THE .O KEY . THE
.# CONTACT IE CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT AT THE
MODE IS CHANGED TO .# !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNC
TERMINALS TURNS OFF THE FUNCTION CONTROL VOLT
TIONS CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNC
AGE ABSENT ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION
TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION
7HEN PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY EACH INPUT FUNC
TION IS DISPLAYED WITH THE INDEX ./ OR .# WHEN THEN MUST BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTRY KEY %
PROCEEDING WITH THE .O KEY .
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE BINARY INPUTS AS DELIVERED
4ABLE  SHOWS A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL THE BINARY INPUT FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P
FUNCTIONS WITH THEIR ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER PENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE
&.O )NPUT FUNCTIONS NATURALLY HAVE NO EFFECT IF THE THE ALLOCATION FOR BINARY INPUT  4ABLE  SHOWS ALL
CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE BINARY INPUTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY

    - ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF BLOCK -ARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS


" ) . ! 2 9 ) . 0 5 4 3

4HE FIRST BINARY INPUT IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

&     " ) . ! 2 9
!LLOCATIONS FOR BINARY INPUT 
) . 0 5 4 

#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !

   ) . 0 5 4  2ESET OF STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS &.O 


NORMALLY OPEN OPERATION
 , % $ R E S E T . / ,%$S ARE RESET WHEN CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT

   ) . 0 5 4 
.O FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE INITIATED BY BINARY INPUT 
N O T A L L O C A T E D

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT BINARY INPUT WITH THE ARROW KEY
!

    " ) . ! 2 9
-ARSHALLING BINARY INPUT 
) . 0 5 4 

&.O !BBREVIATION $ESCRIPTION

 NOT ALLOCATED "INARY INPUT IS NOT ALLOCATED TO ANY INPUT FUNCTION


 4IME 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
 ,%$ RESET 2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
 3TART &LT2EC 3TART FAULT RECORDING FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
 -ANUAL #LOSE #IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
 5 64 MCB &EEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED
 5 64 MCB "US BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ALL POLES CLOSED SERIES CONNECTION
 #" !UX P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ANY POLE CLOSED PARALLEL CONNECTION
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 3YNC 3TART )NITIATE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC "LOCK "LOCK INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC SYNCH 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS CHECK
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS CHECK
 3YNC ORIDE 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE SYNCHRO CHECK
 &LT2EC ON 3WITCH ON FAULT RECORDING FUNCTION
 &LT2EC OFF 3WITCH OFF FAULT RECORDING FUNCTION
 3YNC#HCK ON 3WITCH ON SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC#HCK OFF 3WITCH OFF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 !2 ON 3WITCH ON AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
 !2 OFF 3WITCH OFF AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
 0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAMETER SET SELECTION  IN CONNECTION WITH &.O 
 0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAMETER SET SELECTION  IN CONNECTION WITH &.O 
 3TART !2 3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 P 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2
 P 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK THREE POLE 2!2
 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK 2!2
 !2 "LOCK "LOCK COMPLETE !2 FUNCTION
 $!2 "LOCK "LOCK $!2
 #" 2EADY #IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
 $!2 AFT 2!2 $!2 CYCLE IS ALLOWED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 CYCLE
 3YNC2ELEASE 2ELEASE RECLOSE COMMAND FROM EXTERNAL SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY
 #LOSE#MD "LO "LOCK ALL CLOSING COMMANDS FROM EXTERNAL
 4RIP P !2 3INGLE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2
 4RIP P !2 4HREE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2
 !2 2ESET 2ESET !2

4ABLE  -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR BINARY INPUTS

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

!DDR ST DISPLAY LINE ND DISPLAY LINE &.O 2EMARKS


 -!23(!,,).' ").!29 ).0543 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK

 ").!29 ).054  !CKNOWLEDGE AND RESET OF STORED ,%$ AND DIS
).054  ,%$ RESET ./  PLAY INDICATIONS ,%$ TEST

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  3TART !2 ./  3TART SIGNAL FROM FEEDER PROTECTION

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  4RIP , !2 ./ 

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  4RIP , !2 ./  4RIP COMMANDS FROM FEEDER PROTECTION

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  4RIP , !2 ./ 

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  #" READY ./  &ROM CIRCUIT BREAKER

 ").!29 ).054  -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FROM DISCREPANCY


).054  -ANUAL #LOSE ./  SWITCH

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  !2 BLOCK ./ 

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  #LOSE#MD "LO ./ 
"LOCKING OF AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS
 ").!29 ).054 
).054  2!2 "LOCK ./ 

 ").!29 ).054 


).054  $!2 "LOCK ./ 

 ").!29 ).054  


).054  !2 ON ./ 
3WITCHING THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION
 ").!29 ).054  
).054  !2 OFF ./ 

 ").!29 ).054  


).054  P 2!2 "LOCK ./ 
"LOCKING OF AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTIONS
 ").!29 ).054  
).054  P 2!2 "LOCK ./ 

 ").!29 ).054  


).054  5 64 MCB ./ 
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS
 ").!29 ).054   TRIPPED
).054  5 64 MCB ./ 

 ").!29 ).054   "LOCKING OF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK


).054  3YNC "LOCK ./  FUNCTION CLOSING BLOCKED

 ").!29 ).054   /VERRIDE SYNCHRO CHECK CLOSING RELEASED


).054  3YNC ORIDE ./ 
 PRESETTINGS FOR 6+  PRESETTINGS FOR 6+

4ABLE  0RESET BINARY INPUTS

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE UNIT CONTAINS  SIGNAL OUTPUTS ALARM RELAYS  CIATION FUNCTIONS ARE NATURALLY NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE
4HE SIGNAL RELAYS ARE DESIGNATED 3)'.!, 2%,!9  CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE
TO 3)'.!, 2%,!9  AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN AD RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT  DE CONFI
DRESS BLOCK  4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN GURED REFER TO 3ECTION  
BLOCKS WITH Å Ç OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING $!    
% 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DE 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS AS DELIV
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION  -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE ERED FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS
POSSIBLE IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN IN !PPENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW AN EXAM
BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL PHYSICAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEE ALSO PLE FOR SIGNAL RELAY  WITH THE GROUP ANNUNCIATION
3ECTION   FOR SEVERAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ON ONE SIGNAL
RELAY 4ABLE  SHOWS ALL SIGNAL RELAYS AS PRESET FROM
4ABLE  GIVES A LISTING OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS THE FACTORY
WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBERS &.O !NNUN

    - ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE OUTPUT


3 ) ' . ! , 2 % , ! 9 3 SIGNAL RELAYS

%G SIGNAL RELAY  IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

&     3 ) ' . ! , !LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY 


2 % , ! 9   -EANING 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING

#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !

   2 % , ! 9   3IGNAL RELAY  HAS BEEN PRESET FOR


ST 2!2 SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME IS RUNNING &.O
2 ! 2 4  P R U N  

   2 % , ! 9   3IGNAL RELAY  HAS BEEN PRESET FOR


2 ! 2 4  P R U N  ND 2!2 THREE POLE DEAD TIME IS RUNNING &.O


   2 % , ! 9  
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR SIGNAL RELAY 
N O T A L L O C A T E D

!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY  CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT
WITH & !

    3 ) ' . ! , !LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY 


2 % , ! 9   -EANING 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.OTE AS TO 4ABLE  !NNUNCIATIONS WITH THE FUNCTION NUMBERS BELOW  ARE IDENTICAL WITH THOSE FOR BINARY
INPUTS 4HEY REPRESENT THE DIRECT CONFIRMATION OF THE BINARY INPUT AND ARE AVAILABLE AS LONG AS THE CORRESPOND
ING BINARY INPUT IS ENERGIZED 4HESE DIRECT CONFIRMATION FUNCTIONS ARE INDICATED BY A LEADING  SIGN

&URTHER INFORMATION ABOUT ANNUNCIATIONS SEE 3ECTION 

&.O !BBREVIATION $ESCRIPTION

 NOT ALLOCATED "INARY OUTPUT IS NOT ALLOCATED TO ANY OUTPUT FUNCTION


 4IME 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
 ,%$ RESET 2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
 3TART &LT2EC 3TART FAULT RECORDING FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
 -ANUAL #LOSE #IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
 5 64 MCB &EEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED
 5 64 MCB "US BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX , #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT , , IS CLOSED
 #" !UX P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ALL POLES CLOSED SERIES CONNECTION
 #" !UX P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ANY POLE CLOSED PARALLEL CONNECTION
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 !NNUNC  5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION 
 3YNC 3TART )NITIATE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC "LOCK "LOCK INTERNAL SYNCHRO AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC SYNCH 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS CHECK
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS CHECK
 3YNC ORIDE 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE SYNCHRO CHECK
 &LT2EC ON 3WITCH ON FAULT RECORDING FUNCTION
 &LT2EC OFF 3WITCH OFF FAULT RECORDING FUNCTION
 3YNC#HCK ON 3WITCH ON SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 3YNC#HCK OFF 3WITCH OFF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
 !2 ON 3WITCH ON AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
 !2 OFF 3WITCH OFF AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
 0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAMETER SET SELECTION  IN CONNECTION WITH 
 0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAMETER SET SELECTION  IN CONNECTION WITH 
 3TART !2 3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
 P 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2
 P 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK THREE POLE 2!2
 2!2 "LOCK "LOCK 2!2
 !2 "LOCK "LOCK COMPLETE !2 FUNCTION
 $!2 "LOCK "LOCK $!2
 #" 2EADY #IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
 $!2 AFT 2!2 $!2 CYCLE IS ALLOWED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 CYCLE
 3YNC2ELEASE 2ELEASE RECLOSE COMMAND FROM EXTERNAL SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY
 #LOSE#MD"LO "LOCK CLOSING COMMAND
 4RIP P !2 3INGLE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2
 4RIP P !2 4HREE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2
 !2 2ESET 2ESET !2
 $EV/PERATIVE 2ELAY OPERATIVE
 ,%$ RESET ,%$ INDICATORS RESET
 &LT2EC!CTIV &AULT RECORD DATA ARE AVAILABLE OR BEING TRANSMITTED
 &LT2EC OFF &AULT RECORDING SWITCHED OFF
 0ARAM2UNNING 0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET

4ABLE  -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S #ONTINUED NEXT PAGE

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

&.O !BBREVIATION $ESCRIPTION


 -ANUAL #LOSE -ANUAL CLOSE INDICATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER
 -AN#LOSE #MD -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND
 0ARAM 3ET ! 0ARAMETER 3ET ! IS ACTIVATED
 0ARAM 3ET " 0ARAMETER 3ET " IS ACTIVATED
 0ARAM 3ET # 0ARAMETER 3ET # IS ACTIVATED
 0ARAM 3ET $ 0ARAMETER 3ET $ IS ACTIVATED
 &AILURE 6 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY
 &AILURE 6 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY
 &AILURE 6 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY
 &AILURE 6 &AILURE IN  6 !$ CONVERTER
 &AILURE 2+! &AILURE IN INPUTOUTPUT MODULE
 $EVICE &LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL
 $EVICE 4RIP 'ENERAL TRIP SIGNAL
 !2 OFF !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SWITCHED OFF
 !2 "LOCKED !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION NOT OPERATIVE
 !2 NOT READY !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION NOT READY FOR RECLOSE
 !2 4 #" %XP #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
 #" NOT READY #IRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR A TRIPRECLOSE CYCLE
 !2 "LOCK$YN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BLOCKED FROM INTERNAL SOURCE
 !2 IN PROG !UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IS RUNNING
 2!2 4 !CTRUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION 2!2 ACTION TIME IS RUNNING
 2!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SINGLE POLE 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 !2 4 2ECLRUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION RECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING
 2!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION THREE POLE 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 %6&LT2ECOG !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION EVOLVING FAULT RECOGNIZED
 !2 3UCESSFUL !UTO RECLOSURE WAS SUCCESSFUL
 $EFINIT4RIP &INAL DEFINITIVE TRIP SIGNAL
 #" !LARM 3UPP #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM SUPPRESSED
 !2 #LOSE #MD 2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
 2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER  POLE 2!2
 2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER  POLE 2!2
 $!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER  POLE $!2
 P 4RIP 0ERM 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIP
 2!2 P 0ROG 2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO RECLOSE ONLY POLE
 2!2 P 0ROG 2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO RECLOSE ONLY POLE
 2!2 :ONE 2EL 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN AN 2!2 STAGE
 $!2 :ONE 2EL $!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN AN $!2 STAGE
 3YNC-EAS3T !2 REQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
 2!2 /NLY 2!2 CYCLE IS ONLY ALLOWED $!2 BLOCKED
 $!2 /NLY $!2 CYCLE IS ONLY ALLOWED 2!2 IS OVERRIDDEN
 $!2 4 !#4RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ACTION TIME IS RUNNING
 $!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ST DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 $!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ND DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 $!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 RD DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 !2 P IN PROG !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INITIATED BY SINGLE POLE TRIP
 !2 P IN PROG !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INITIATED BY THREE POLE TRIP
 3YNC OFF 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS SWITCHED OFF
 3YNC RUNNING 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS RUNNING
 3YNC FAULTY 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS FAULTY
 3YNC4SUP%XP 3YNCHRONISM CHECK SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
 3YNC/VERRIDE 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS PROGRAMMED TO OVERRIDE
 3YNC 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONISM CHECK SYNCHRONISM IS FULFILLED
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM CHECK TO LIVE LINE DEAD BUS IS FULFILLED
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM CHECK TO DEAD LINE LIVE BUS IS FULFILLED
 3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM CHECK TO DEAD LINE DEAD BUS IS FULFILLED
 3YNC "LOCKED 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS BLOCKED
 3YNC 2ELEASE 3YNCHRONISM CHECK RELEASE COMMAND
 3YNC#LOSE#MD 3YNCHRONISM CHECK CLOSE COMMAND
 3YNC$EL 5 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —5 EXCEEDED
 3YNC$EL F 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —F EXCEEDED
 3YNC$EL0() 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —„ EXCEEDED

4ABLE  -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

!DDR ST DISPLAY LINE ND DISPLAY LINE &.O 2EMARKS


 -!23(!,,).' 3)'.!, 2%,!93 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK

 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 FUNCTION IS AT THE MOMENT NOT READY FOR


2%,!9  !2 NOT READY  RECLOSING

 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 CYCLE IN PROGRESS


2%,!9  !2 IN PROG 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 FUNCTION INTERNALLY BLOCKED
2%,!9  !2 "LOCK$YN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO RELEASE 2!2 ZONE OF
2%,!9  2!2 :ONE 2EL  THE FEEDER PROTECTION

 3)'.!, 2%,!9  $EVICE OPERATIVE THE .# CONTACT OF THIS


2%,!9  $EVOPERATIVE  RELAY INDICATES $EVICE FAULT

 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 WAS SUCCESSFUL


2%,!9  !2 3UCESSFUL 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 WAS UNSUCCESSFUL FINAL TRIP
2%,!9  $EFINIT4RIP 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM SUPPRESSION
2%,!9  #" !LARM 3UPP 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  !2 RECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING
2%,!9  !2 4 2ECLRUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9 
2%,!9  2!2 4 P RUN  2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
2%,!9  2!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN  $!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN 
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9   INDIVIDUAL DEAD TIMES OF $!2
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9  
2%,!9  $!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9   %VOLVING FAULT RECOGNITION DURING SINGLE
2%,!9  %6&LT2ECOG  POLE 2!2

 3)'.!, 2%,!9   2!2  POLE DEAD TIME IS RUNNING


2%,!9  2!2 4 P RUN 
 3)'.!, 2%,!9   3YNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED TO
2%,!9  3YNC/VERRIDE  OVERRIDE  CLOSING RELEASE WITHOUT CHECK

 3)'.!, 2%,!9   3YNCHRO CHECK SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED


2%,!9  3YNC4SUP%XP  NO MORE RELEASE

 3)'.!, 2%,!9   3YNCHRO CHECK IS BLOCKED NO MORE RE


2%,!9  3YNC "LOCKED  LEASE

 3)'.!, 2%,!9  


2%,!9  3YNC RUNNING  3YNCHRO CHECK IS RUNNING
 PRESETTINGS FOR 6+  PRESETTINGS FOR 6+

4ABLE  0RESET ANNUNCIATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAYS

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE UNIT CONTAINS  ,%$S FOR OPTICAL INDICATIONS  OF 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER IT IS NOT NEC
WHICH CAN BE MARSHALLED 4HEY ARE DESIGNATED ,%$ ESSARY TO INPUT THE LEADING ZEROS 4O INDICATE WHETH
 TO ,%$  AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN ADDRESS BLOCK ER THE STORED OR UNSTORED MODE SHALL BE EFFECTIVE THE
 4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS WITH Å FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
Ç OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $!     % 4HE POINT FOLLOWED BY  OR  WHEREBY
SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DESCRIBED IN
3ECTION  -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE POSSIBLE  UNSTORED INDICATION NOT MEMORIZED CORRE
SPONDS TO NM AS ABOVE
IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN BE GIVEN TO
 STORED INDICATION MEMORIZED CORRESPONDS
SEVERAL ,%$S SEE ALSO 3ECTION  
TO M AS ABOVE
!PART FROM THE LOGICAL FUNCTION EACH ,%$ CAN BE )F THE EXTENSION WITH  OR  IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY
MARSHALLED TO OPERATE EITHER IN THE STORED MODE M SHOWS FIRST THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN UNSTORED
FOR MEMORIZED OR UNSTORED MODE NM FOR NOT MEM MODE WITH NM  0RESS THE .O KEY . TO CHANGE TO
ORIZED  %ACH ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION IS DISPLAYED STORED MODE M  !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNCTIONS
WITH THE INDEX M OR NM WHEN PROCEEDING WITH THE . CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNCTIONS FOR
KEY WARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS WITH THE
BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION THEN MUST
4HE MARSHALLABLE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ARE THE BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTER KEY %
SAME AS THOSE LISTED IN 4ABLE  !NNUNCIATION FUNC
TIONS ARE OF COURSE NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE CORRE 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE ,%$S AS PRESET BY THE FACTORY
SPONDING FUNCTION HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE IS SHOWN IN THE FRONT OF THE UNIT &IGURE   4HE FOL
LOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE THE ASSIGNMENT
CONFIGURED 
FOR ,%$  4ABLE  SHOWS ALL ,%$ INDICATORS AS THEY
ARE PRESET FROM THE FACTORY

    - ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ IN


, % $ ). $ ) # ! 4 / 2 3 DICATORS

4HE FIRST MARSHALLABLE ,%$ IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

    , % $  !LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$ 


-EANING $EVICE NOT READY FOR CLOSING

#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !

   , % $  ,%$  HAS BEEN PRESET FOR


ST !2 FUNCTION NOT READY FOR RECLOSING &.O 
! 2 N O T R E A D Y N M

   , % $  ,%$  HAS BEEN PRESET FOR


3 Y N C  B L O C K E D N M ND 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS
BLOCKED &.O 

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

   , % $ 
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR ,%$ 
N O T A L L O C A T E D

!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR ,%$  CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT WITH & !

    , % $  !LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$ 

4HE COMPLETE PRE SETTINGS FOR ,%$ INDICATORS ARE LISTED IN 4ABLE 

!DDR ST DISPLAY LINE ND DISPLAY LINE &.O 2EMARKS


 -!23(!,,).' ,%$S (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK

 ,%$ 
,%$  !2 NOT READY NM  #LOSING NOT POSSIBLE AT THE MOMENT

,%$  3YNC BLOCKED NM 

 ,%$  !2 CYCLE IN PROGRESS


,%$  !2 IN PROG NM 

 ,%$ 
,%$  2!2 4 P RUN NM  2!2 DEAD TIME RUNNING
,%$  2!2 4 P RUN NM 

 ,%$ 
,%$  $!2 4 P RUN NM 
,%$  $!2 4 P RUN NM  $!2 DEAD TIME RUNNING
,%$  $!2 4 P RUN NM 

 ,%$  2ECLAIM TIME RUNNING


,%$  !2 4 2ECLRUN NM 

 ,%$ 
,%$  $EFINIT4RIP M  &INAL TRIP BY THE FEEDER PROTECTION

 6+ ONLY

4ABLE  0RESET ,%$ INDICATORS

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 -ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE UNIT CONTAINS  TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE DESIGNATED 0RINCIPALLY ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS IN ACCORDANCE
42)0 2%,!9  AND 42)0 2%,!9  4HE TRIP RELAYS CAN WITH 4ABLE  CAN BE MARSHALLED TO OUTPUT COM
BE MARSHALLED IN THE ADDRESS BLOCK  4HE BLOCK IS MAND RELAYS
REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS WITH Å Ç OR BY DIRECTLY
ADDRESSING WITH $! INPUT OF THE ADDRESS NUMBER 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE TRIP RELAYS AS DELIVERED FROM
    AND PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % 4HE SELECTION FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !PPEN
PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION DIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW AN EXAMPLE FOR MAR
 -ULTIPLE COMMANDS ARE POSSIBLE IE ONE LOG
SHALLING OF TRIP RELAY  4ABLE  SHOWS ALL TRIP RELAYS
ICAL COMMAND FUNCTION CAN BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL TRIP
AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
RELAYS SEE ALSO 3ECTION  

    - ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE TRIP RE


4 2 ) 0 2 % , ! 9 3 LAYS

4HE FIRST TRIP RELAY IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

    4 2 ) 0
!LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY 
2 % , ! 9 

#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !

   4 2 ) 0 2 % ,   4RIP RELAY  HAS BEEN PRESET FOR


#LOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION &.O
! 2 # L O S E # M D  

   4 2 ) 0 2 % ,  
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR TRIP RELAY 
N O T A L L O C A T E D

,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT TRIP RELAY WITH THE ARROW KEY !

    4 2 ) 0
!LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY 
2 % , ! 9 

!DDR ST DISPLAY LINE ND DISPLAY LINE &.O 2EMARKS


 -!23(!,,).' 42)0 2%,!93 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK

 42)0 2%,!9  2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNC


42)0 2%,  !2 #LOSE #MD  TION

 42)0 2%,!9  2!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE


42)0 2%,  P 4RIP 0ERM  TRIP NO THREE POLE COUPLING

4ABLE  0RESET COMMAND FUNCTIONS FOR TRIP RELAYS

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

 #ONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION


ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE UNIT MUST BE INFORMED AS TO WHETHER IT IS USED AS 4HEY ARE VALID ALSO FOR IDENTIFICATION OF THE DEVICE IN
A COMPONENT IN A LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION THE CONTROL CENTRE
SYSTEM OR NOT )F A CENTRAL UNIT IS NOT CONNECTED NO
FURTHER INFORMATION IS REQUIRED SINCE THE UNIT IS PRE "LOCK  CAN BE CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH KEYS Å Ç
SET TO ,3!  ./. %8)34  OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $!     %
/THERWISE BLOCK  CONTAINS SEVERAL QUESTIONS )N ADDITION ANNUNCIATIONS AND MESSAGES WHICH
WHICH MUST BE ANSWERED &OR THIS THE CODEWORD
SHOULD BE TRANSMITTED TO THE CONTROL CENTRE MUST BE
MUST BE ENTERED REFER TO 3ECTION   4HE ENTERED
COORDINATED WITH THE CENTRAL STATION !LL ANNUNCI
DATA MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE CENTRAL UNIT 4HEY
REFER TO THE "AUD RATE OF THE SERIAL DATA TRANSFER 4HE ATIONS WHICH CAN BE PROCESSED BY THE ,3! ARE
IDENTIFICATION ADDRESS OF THE INDIVIDUAL DEVICE AND ITS STORED WITHIN THE DEVICE IN A SEPARATE TABLE &OR ALLO
MEASUREMENT AND FAULT DATA HAS BEEN PARAMETER CATION OF ,3! COMPATIBLE ANNUNCIATIONS 4ABLE 
IZED UNDER ADDRESSES  AND  REFER TO 3EC IS VALID
TION  

    , 3 ! "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK ,OCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTO


# / . & ) ' 5 2 ! 4 ) / . MATION ,3! COUPLING

    " ! 5 $ 2 ! 4 % "AUDRATE FOR SERIAL INTERFACE


!VAILABLE SETTINGS  "!5$ OR  "!5$ OR
    " ! 5 $  "!5$

    " ! 5 $

     " ! 5 $

.OTE FOR ,3! 4HE PARAMETERS $%6)#% !$$RESS AND &%%$%2 !$$RESS WHICH HAD BEEN ENTERED TO THE DEVICE
UNDER THIS ITEM ARE NOW SET IN THE ADDRESS BLOCK  WHEN SETTING THE OPERATING PARAMETERS REFER TO 3ECTION
 4HEY ARE VALID FOR THE OPERATION INTERFACE FOR OPERATION WITH A PERSONAL COMPUTER AS WELL AS FOR THE ,3!
INTERFACE )F THE DEVICE IS CONNECTED TO A CENTRAL CONTROL STATION THEN THESE PARAMETERS SHOULD NOW BE RE
CHECKED

!DDRESS  $%6)#% !$$  TO 


!DDRESS  &%%$%2 !$$  TO 

4HE FOLLOWING MEASURED VALUES ARE TRANSMITTED

-EASURED VOLTAGE VALUE 5


-EASURED VOLTAGE VALUE 5
-EASURED FREQUENCY VALUE F
-EASURED FREQUENCY VALUE F
-EASURED VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE —5
-EASURED FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F
-EASURED PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„

 # ' #


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

&.O CORRESPONDING
!NNUNCIATION
,3! !NNUNC &.O
 &EEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED 
 "US BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS TRIPPED 
 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION  
 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION  
 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION  
 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION  
 )NITIATE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION 
 "LOCK INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION 
 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM 
 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS CHECK 
 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK 
 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS CHECK 
 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE SYNCHRO CHECK 
 3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2 
 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2 
 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2 
 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2 
 "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2 
 "LOCK THREE POLE 2!2 
 "LOCK 2!2 
 "LOCK COMPLETE !2 FUNCTION 
 "LOCK $!2 
 #IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE 
 $!2 CYCLE IS ALLOWED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 CYCLE 
 2ELEASE RECLOSE COMMAND FROM EXTERNAL SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY 
 "LOCK CLOSING COMMAND 
 3INGLE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2 
 4HREE POLE TRIP FOR INITIATION OF !2 
 2ELAY OPERATIVE 
 2E START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM 
 &AULT IN THE NETWORK 
 ,%$ INDICATORS RESET 
 2ELATIVE TIME RESPONSE TO ,3! 
 0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET 
 -ANUAL CLOSE INDICATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 
 -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND 
 0ARAMETER 3ET ! IS ACTIVATED 
 0ARAMETER 3ET " IS ACTIVATED 
 0ARAMETER 3ET # IS ACTIVATED 
 0ARAMETER 3ET $ IS ACTIVATED 
 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY 
 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY 
 &AILURE IN  6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY 
 &AILURE IN  6 !$ CONVERTER 
 &AILURE IN BASE INPUTOUTPUT MODULE 
 !NNUNCIATION FOR ,3! LOST 

4ABLE  !NNUNCIATIONS FOR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION WITH ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBERS &.O
CONTINUED NEXT PAGE

# ' # 


6+ 6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

&.O CORRESPONDING
!NNUNCIATION
,3! !NNUNC &.O
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SWITCHED OFF 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION NOT READY FOR RECLOSE 
 #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED 
 #IRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR A TRIPRECLOSE CYCLE 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BLOCKED FROM INTERNAL SOURCE 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION 2!2 ACTION TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SINGLE POLE 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION RECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION THREE POLE 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION EVOLVING FAULT DURING DEAD TIME 
 !UTO RECLOSURE WAS SUCCESSFUL 
 &INAL TRIP SIGNAL 
 #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM SUPPRESSED 
 2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION 
 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIP 
 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN AN 2!2 STAGE 
 $!2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN AN $!2 STAGE 
 !2 REQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ACTION TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ST DEAD TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 ND DEAD TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION $!2 RD DEAD TIME IS RUNNING 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INITIATED BY SINGLE POLE TRIP 
 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INITIATED BY THREE POLE TRIP 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS SWITCHED OFF 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS RUNNING 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS FAULTY 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS PROGRAMMED TO OVERRIDE 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK SYNCHRONISM IS FULFILLED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK LIVE LINE DEAD BUS IS FULFILLED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK DEAD LINE LIVE BUS IS FULFILLED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK DEAD LINE DEAD BUS IS FULFILLED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK IS BLOCKED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK RELEASE COMMAND 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK CLOSE COMMAND 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —5 EXCEEDED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —F EXCEEDED 
 3YNCHRONISM CHECK —„ EXCEEDED 
 $ROP OFF OF THE DEVICE 

4ABLE  !NNUNCIATIONS FOR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION WITH ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBERS &.O

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3AFETY PRECAUTIONS 4HE KEYBOARD COMPRISES  KEYS WITH NUMBERS


9ES.O AND CONTROL BUTTONS 4HE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE
KEYS IS EXPLAINED IN DETAIL IN THE FOLLOWING

 7ARNING .UMERICAL KEYS FOR THE INPUT OF NUMERALS

!LL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHICH APPLY FOR WORK


IN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ARE TO BE OBSERVED
DURING TESTS AND COMMISSIONING  TO  $IGITS  TO  FOR NUMERICAL INPUT

 #AUTION
$ECIMAL POINT
#ONNECTION OF THE DEVICE TO A BATTERY CHAR
GER WITHOUT CONNECTED BATTERY MAY CAUSE
IMPERMISSIBLY HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH DAMAGE
THE DEVICE 3EE ALSO 3ECTION  UNDER 0 )NFINITY SYMBOL
4ECHNICAL DATA FOR LIMITS

#HANGE OF SIGN INPUT OF



NEGATIVE NUMBERS

 $IALOG WITH THE RELAY

3ETTING OPERATION AND INTERROGATION OF DIGITAL PROTEC 9ES.O KEYS FOR TEXT PARAMETERS
TION AND AUTOMATION SYSTEMS CAN BE CARRIED OUT VIA
THE INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY
PANEL LOCATED ON THE FRONT PLATE !LL THE NECESSARY 9ES KEY OPERATOR AFFIRMS THE DIS
*9
PLAYED QUESTION
OPERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE ENTERED AND ALL THE IN
FORMATION CAN BE READ OUT FROM HERE /PERATION IS
ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE VIA THE INTERFACE SOCKET BY
MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR .O KEY OPERATOR DENIES THE DIS
. PLAYED QUESTION OR REJECTS A SUG
GESTION AND REQUESTS FOR ALTERNA
TIVE

 -EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DIS


PLAY PANEL
+EYS FOR PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY
4HE MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL IS EXTER
NALLY ARRANGED SIMILAR TO A POCKET CALCULATOR &IGURE 0AGING FORWARDS THE NEXT AD
 ILLUSTRATES THE FRONT VIEW DRESS IS DISPLAYED

! TWO LINE EACH  CHARACTER LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY


0AGING BACKWARDS THE PREVIOUS
PRESENTS THE INFORMATION %ACH CHARACTER COMPRISES ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
A  X  DOT MATRIX .UMBERS LETTERS AND A SERIES OF
SPECIAL SYMBOLS CAN BE DISPLAYED
"LOCK PAGING FORWARDS THE BE
$URING DIALOG THE UPPER LINE GIVES A FOUR FIGURE NUM GINNING OF THE NEXT ADDRESS BLOCK
BER FOLLOWED BY A BAR 4HIS NUMBER PRESENTS THE SET IS DISPLAYED
TING ADDRESS 4HE FIRST TWO DIGITS INDICATE THE AD
DRESS BLOCK THEN FOLLOWS THE TWO DIGIT SEQUENCE "LOCK PAGING BACKWARDS THE BE
NUMBER )N MODELS WITH PARAMETER CHANGE OVER FA GINNING OF PREVIOUS ADDRESS
CILITY THE IDENTIFIER OF THE PARAMETER SET IS SHOWN BE BLOCK IS DISPLAYED
FORE THE SETTING ADDRESS

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

#ONFIRMATION KEY  /PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COM


%NTER OR CONFIRMATION KEY EACH PUTER
% NUMERICAL INPUT OR CHANGE VIA THE
9ES.O KEYS MUST BE CONFIRMED BY ! PERSONAL COMPUTER ALLOWS JUST AS THE OPERATOR
THE ENTER KEY ONLY THEN DOES THE PANEL ALL THE APPROPRIATE SETTINGS AND READ OUT OF
DEVICE ACCEPT THE CHANGE 4HE EN DATA BUT WITH THE ADDED COMFORT OF SCREEN BASED
TER KEY CAN ALSO BE USED TO AC VISUALIZATION AND A MENU GUIDED PROCEDURE
KNOWLEDGE AND CLEAR A FAULT
PROMPT IN THIS DISPLAY A NEW INPUT
!LL DATA CAN BE READ IN FROM OR COPIED ONTO MAGNET
AND REPEATED USE OF THE ENTER KEY
IS THEN NECESSARY IC DATA CARRIER FLOPPY DISC EG FOR SETTINGS AND CON
FIGURATION  !DDITIONALLY ALL THE DATA CAN BE DOCU
MENTED ON A CONNECTED PRINTER )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE BY
#ONTROL AND SPECIAL KEYS CONNECTING A PLOTTER TO PRINT OUT THE FAULT HISTORY
TRACES
#ODEWORD PREVENTS UNAUTHO
#7 RIZED ACCESS TO SETTING PROGRAMS &OR OPERATION OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER THE INSTRUC
NOT NECESSARY FOR CALL UP OF AN TION MANUALS OF THIS DEVICE ARE TO BE OBSERVED 4HE
NUNCIATIONS OR MESSAGES
0# PROGRAM $)'3) IS AVAILABLE FOR SETTING AND PRO
CESSING OF ALL DIGITAL PROTECTION DATA .OTE THAT THE
"ACKSPACE ERASURE OF INCORRECT OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT OF THE RELAY IS NOT GAL
2
ENTRIES
VANICALLY ISOLATED AND THAT ONLY ADEQUATE CONNEC
TION CABLES ARE APPLIED EG 86   &URTHER
&UNCTION KEY EXPLAINED WHEN INFORMATION ABOUT FACILITIES ON REQUEST
&
USED

$IRECT ADDRESSING IF THE ADDRESS  /PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS


$! NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS KEY ALLOWS
DIRECT CALL UP OF THE ADDRESS
&OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE
WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE
-ESSAGES3IGNALS INTERROGATION MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON
-3 OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT AND OPER CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE
ATING DATA REFER 3ECTION 
SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS
FUNCTIONS
4HE THREE KEYS ! Å 2%3%4 WHICH ARE SOMEWHAT
SEPARATED FROM THE REST OF THE KEYS CAN BE AC ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF TRIP RELAYS SIGNALS
CESSED WHEN THE FRONT COVER IS CLOSED 4HE ARROWS BINARY INPUTS ,%$ INDICATORS
HAVE THE SAME FUNCTION AS THE KEYS WITH IDENTICAL
SYMBOLS IN THE MAIN FIELD AND ENABLE PAGING IN FOR CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR OPERATION LANGUAGE
WARD DIRECTION 4HUS ALL SETTING VALUES AND EVENT AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION
DATA CAN BE DISPLAYED WITH THE FRONT COVER CLOSED
&URTHERMORE STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT CAN 4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
BE ERASED VIA THE 2%3%4 KEY WITHOUT OPENING THE NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
FRONT COVER $URING RESET OPERATION ALL ,%$S ON THE READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
FRONT WILL BE ILLUMINATED THUS PERFORMING A ,%$ TEST
7ITH THIS RESET ADDITIONALLY THE FAULT EVENT INDICA 4HE METHOD OF ENTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS EXPLAINED IN
TIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE DEVICE DETAIL IN THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UNDER 3ECTION
ARE ACKNOWLEDGED THE DISPLAY SHOWS THEN THE OP 
ERATIONAL VALUES OF THE QUIESCENT STATE 4HE DISPLAY IS
SWITCHED OVER TO OPERATING MODE AS SOON AS ONE OF
THE KEYS $! -3 #7 OR Å IS PRESSED

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW

2EADINESS INDICATION
GREEN

5NIT FAULTY INDICATION


RED

"ETRIEB3ERVICE
4WO LINE DISPLAY
,#$ WITH  CHARAC
3T¶RUNG"LOCKED
TERS EACH


,%$  TO  RED CAN
BE MARSHALLED PRE
7IEDEREINSCHALTAUTOMATIK 
SETTING BELOW
!UTO RECLOSE RELAY


!DDITIONAL KEYS 
CAN BE ACCESSED
#7   
WHEN COVER IS /PERATOR
PANEL
CLOSED
2   

&   

2%3%4
,%$ $! 

-3 *9 .  %
POLE SOCKET FOR CON
NECTING A PERSONAL
COMPUTER

5.   6 ^ m
5(    6

F.    (Z

 ;n )))=
$IAGR # ! 8


6+ & .R

/N/&& SWITCH

&ACTORY PRESETTING ,%$S

 $EVICE NOT READY TO CLOSE


 !UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IN PROGRESS
 $!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 2!2 DEAD TIME IS RUNNING
 2ECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING
 &INAL TRIP OF FEEDER PROTECTION

&IGURE  &RONT VIEW OF OPERATING KEY BOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

 )NTRODUCTION

 0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE !DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE TEXT INPUT

&OR SETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IT IS NECESSARY 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE
TO ENTER THE CODEWORD SEE   7ITHOUT CODE BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG  FOR BLOCK
WORD ENTRY PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE  SEQUENCE NUMBER   "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS
CHANGED THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC
OND DISPLAY LINE THE APPLICABLE TEXT 7HEN THE
)F THE CODEWORD IS ACCEPTED PARAMETERIZING CAN BE RELAY IS DELIVERED A TEXT HAS BEEN PRESET )N THE
GIN )N THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS ILLUS FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS TEXT IS SHOWN )F IT IS TO BE
TRATED IN A BOX AND IS EXPLAINED 4HERE ARE THREE RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECESSARY /NE CAN
FORMS OF DISPLAY PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN THE BLOCK OR TO
THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE TEXT NEEDS TO BE
!DDRESSES WITHOUT REQUEST FOR OPERATOR INPUT ALTERED PRESS THE .O KEY . 4HE NEXT ALTERNATIVE
TEXT ALSO PRINTED IN THE DISPLAY BOXES ILLUSTRATED IN
4HE ADDRESS IS IDENTIFIED BY THE BLOCK NUMBER FOL THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THEN APPEARS )F THE ALTER
LOWED BY  AS SEQUENCE NUMBER EG  FOR NATIVE TEXT IS NOT DESIRED THE . KEY IS PRESSED
BLOCK   $ISPLAYED TEXT FORMS THE HEADING OF THIS AGAIN ETC 4HE ALTERNATIVE WHICH IS CHOSEN IS
BLOCK .O INPUT IS EXPECTED "Y USING KEYS Å OR Ç CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE CHANGED
THE NEXT OR THE PREVIOUS BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED "Y PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TERMINATION OF PA
USING THE KEYS ! OR " THE FIRST OR LAST ADDRESS WITHIN RAMETERIZING REFER BELOW 
THE BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED AND PAGED
&OR EACH OF THE ADDRESSES THE POSSIBLE PARAMETERS
!DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE NUMERICAL INPUT AND TEXT ARE GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS )F THE
MEANING OF A PARAMETER IS NOT CLEAR IT IS USUALLY BEST
4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE TO LEAVE IT AT THE FACTORY SETTING 4HE ARROWS ÅÇ OR !"
BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG  FOR BLOCK AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE ILLUSTRATED DISPLAY BOXES
 SEQUENCE NUMBER   "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS INDICATE THE METHOD OF MOVING FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK OR
THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC WITHIN THE BLOCK 5NUSED ADDRESSES ARE AUTOMATI
OND DISPLAY LINE THE VALUE OF THE PARAMETER 7HEN CALLY PASSED OVER
THE RELAY IS DELIVERED A VALUE HAS BEEN PRESET )N
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS VALUE IS SHOWN )F THIS
)F THE PARAMETER ADDRESS IS KNOWN THEN DIRECT AD
VALUE IS TO BE RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECES
DRESSING IS POSSIBLE 4HIS IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING
SARY /NE CAN PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN
KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS AND SUB
THE BLOCK OR TO THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE
SEQUENTLY PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % !FTER DIRECT AD
VALUE NEEDS TO BE ALTERED IT CAN BE OVERWRITTEN US
DRESSING PAGING BY MEANS OF KEYS Å Ç AND KEYS ! "
ING THE NUMERICAL KEYS AND IF REQUIRED THE DECI
IS POSSIBLE
MAL POINT ANDOR CHANGE SIGN   OR WHERE AP
PROPRIATE INFINITY SIGN 0 4HE PERMISSIBLE SETTING
RANGE IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING TEXT NEXT TO THE AS 4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
SOCIATED BOX %NTERED VALUES BEYOND THIS RANGE THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
WILL BE REJECTED 4HE SETTING STEPS CORRESPOND TO KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
THE LAST DECIMAL PLACE AS SHOWN IN THE SETTING BOX THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3  #ONFIRM
)NPUTS WITH MORE DECIMAL PLACES THAN PERMITTED WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
WILL BE TRUNCATED DOWN TO THE PERMISSIBLE NUMBER COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
4HE VALUE MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL
% 4HE DISPLAY THEN CONFIRMS THE ACCEPTED VALUE TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
4HE CHANGED PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TER CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
MINATION OF PARAMETERIZING REFER BELOW  CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE FUNCTION !LL PARAMETER SETS CAN BE ACCESSED IN A SIMILAR MAN
AL PARAMETER BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS  TO  NER
WITH KEYS Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$
/& #/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/.   0RESS THE .O C +EY COMBINATION & 
KEY . TO CONTINUE PARAMETERIZING )F YOU PRESS THE ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !
9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3   .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM C +EY COMBINATION & 
WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "

!FTER COMPLETION OF THE PARAMETERIZING PROCESS THE C +EY COMBINATION & 


CHANGED PARAMETERS WHICH SO FAR HAVE ONLY BEEN ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #
STORED IN VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY
STORED IN %%02/-S 4HE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7 C +EY COMBINATION & 
3%44).'3 3!6%$  !FTER PRESSING THE KEY -3 FOL ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $
LOWED BY 2%3%4 ,%$ THE INDICATIONS OF THE QUIES
CENT STATE APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS AGAIN NECESSARY FOR THE SET
TING OF A NEW SELECTED PARAMETER SET 7ITHOUT INPUT
OF THE CODEWORD THE SETTINGS CAN ONLY BE READ BUT
NOT MODIFIED
 3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS
3INCE ONLY A FEW PARAMETERS WILL BE DIFFERENT IN MOST
5P TO  DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED APPLICATIONS IT IS POSSIBLE TO COPY PREVIOUSLY STORED
FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES PARAMETER SETS INTO ANOTHER PARAMETER SET
ABOVE  AND BELOW  4HESE PARAMETER SETS
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING )T IS ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE TO SELECT THE ORIGINAL SET
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US TINGS IE THE SETTINGS PRESET ON DELIVERY FOR A MODI
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING FIED AND STORED PARAMETER SET 4HIS IS DONE BY COPY
BINARY INPUTS ING THE /2)'3%4 TO THE DESIRED PARAMETER SET

)F THIS FACILITY IS NOT USED THEN IT IS SUFFICIENT TO SET THE )T IS FINALLY STILL POSSIBLE TO DEFINE THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
PARAMETERS FOR THE PRESELECTED SET 4HE REST OF THIS SET IE THE PARAMETER SET WHICH IS VALID FOR THE FUNC
SECTION IS OF NO IMPORTANCE /THERWISE THE PARAME TIONS AND THRESHOLD VALUES OF THE UNIT 3EE 3ECTION
TER CHANGE OVER FACILITY MUST BE CONFIGURED AS %8  FOR MORE DETAILS
)34 UNDER ADDRESS  REFER TO 3ECTION   4HE
FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER 4HE PARAMETER SETS ARE PROCESSED IN ADDRESS BLOCK
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS IS ADJUSTED  4HE MOST SIMPLE MANNER TO COME TO THIS BLOCK IS
ONE AFTER THE OTHER USING DIRECT ADDRESSING

)F THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS TO BE USED FIRST SET ALL PA PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
RAMETERS FOR THE NORMAL STATUS OF PARAMETER SET ! ENTER ADDRESS EG    
4HEN SWITCH OVER TO PARAMETER SET " PRESS ENTER KEY %

&IST COMPLETE THE PARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE FOR 4HE HEADING OF THE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING THE PARAME
SET ! AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION  TER SETS THEN APPEARS

0RESS KEY COMBINATION &  IE FIRST THE FUNCTION )T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS
KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY  !LL FOLLOWING IN ES USING THE ! KEY 4HE COPYING FACILITIES ARE SUMMA
PUTS THEN REFER TO PARAMETER SET " RIZED IN 4ABLE 

    0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER 


# ( ! . ' % / 6 % 2 PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

&OLLOWING COPYING ONLY SUCH PARAMETERS NEED BE


#OPY
!DDR CHANGED WHICH ARE TO BE DIFFERENT FROM THE SOURCE
FROM TO PARAMETER SET
 /2)'3%4 3%4 !
0ARAMETERIZING MUST BE TERMINATED FOR EACH PARAM
 /2)'3%4 3%4 " ETER SET AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION 

 /2)'3%4 3%4 #

 /2)'3%4 3%4 $  3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME


 3%4 ! 3%4 "
4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE SET IF THE UNIT IS EQUIPPED
 3%4 ! 3%4 # WITH THE REAL TIME CLOCK 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK
 WHICH IS REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $!
 3%4 ! 3%4 $     % OR BY PAGING WITH Å AND Ç )NPUT OF THE
CODEWORD IS REQUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA
 3%4 " 3%4 !
3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER
 3%4 " 3%4 # SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
 3%4 " 3%4 $

 3%4 # 3%4 ! 4HE DATE AND TIME ARE ENTERED WITH DOTS AS SEPARA
TOR SIGNS SINCE THE KEYBOARD DOES NOT HAVE A COLON
 3%4 # 3%4 " OR SLASH FOR !MERICAN DATE 

 3%4 # 3%4 $ 4HE CLOCK IS SYNCHRONIZED AT THE MOMENT WHEN THE
ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED FOLLOWING INPUT OF THE COM
 3%4 $ 3%4 ! PLETE TIME 4HE DIFFERENCE TIME FACILITY ADDRESS
 ENABLES EXACT SETTING OF THE TIME SINCE THE DIF
 3%4 $ 3%4 "
FERENCE CAN BE CALCULATED PRIOR TO THE INPUT AND THE
 3%4 $ 3%4 # SYNCHRONIZATION OF THE CLOCK DOES NOT DEPEND ON THE
MOMENT WHEN THE ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED
4ABLE  #OPYING PARAMETER SETS

    3 % 4 4 ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK


2 % ! , 4 ) - % # , / # + #ONTINUE WITH !

          !T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED


        #ONTINUE WITH !

%NTER THE NEW DATE  DIGITS FOR DAY  DIGITS FOR MONTH
    $ ! 4 % AND  DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY  USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS  SECTION  BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999

    4 ) - % %NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH


WITH  DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33

5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY


    $ ) & &  4 ) - % THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE  KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 )NITIAL DISPLAYS ADDRESS BLOCKS  AND 

7HEN THE RELAY IS SWITCHED ON OR THE OPERATOR TERMINAL HAS BEEN CONNECTED FIRSTLY THE ADDRESS  AND THE
TYPE IDENTIFICATION OF THE RELAY APPEARS !LL 3IEMENS RELAYS HAVE AN -,&" MACHINE READABLE TYPE NUMBER 
7HEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATIVE AND DISPLAYS A QUIESCENT MESSAGE ANY DESIRED ADDRESS CAN BE REACHED EG BY
PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS NUMBER

4HE RELAY INTRODUCES ITSELF BY GIVING ITS TYPE NUM


     6 +    6  
BER AND THE VERSION OF FIRMWARE WITH WHICH IT IS
 6 +   









EQUIPPED 4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS THE
COMPLETE ORDERING DESIGNATION

!FTER ADDRESS  THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS BEGIN &URTHER ADDRESS POSSIBILITIES ARE LISTED UNDER !NNUNCI
ATIONS AND 4ESTS 

    #OMMENCEMENT OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER BLOCKS


0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 3

 0OWER SYSTEM DATA ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE RELAY REQUESTS BASIC DATA OF THE POWER SYSTEM AND THE SWITCHGEAR 4HE RATED VOLTAGES ADDRESSES 
AND  ARE OF NO CONCERN FOR THE ACTUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE BUT ARE USED FOR THE CALCULATION OF
THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES REFER TO 3ECTION   )F RATED VALUES OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE AND THE BUS BAR
VOLTAGE ARE DIFFERENT EG BECAUSE A POWER TRANSFORMER IS SITUATED BETWEEN BUS BAR AND FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMERS THEN THE RATED VALUE OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE IS SET 4HE RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGES MUST BE EQUAL

   
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0OWER SYSTEM DATA
0 / 7 % 2 3 9 3 4 % - $ ! 4 !

    5 N 0 2 ) - ! 2 9 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER PRIMARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE


3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  K6
   K 6 ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  K6

6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE


    5 N 3 % # / . $  3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  6
   6 ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  6

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

)F THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS %XAMPLE


USED NOTE THAT THE FEEDER VOLTAGE IS DESIGNATED WITH
5 IT IS THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR THE DEVICE FUNC "US BAR  K6 PRIMARY
TIONS WHICH OPERATE WITH MEASURED VOLTAGES 4HE  6 SECONDARY
BUS BAR VOLTAGE IS DESIGNATED 5
&EEDER  K6 PRIMARY
)F A POWER TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED BETWEEN THE BUS  6 SECONDARY
BAR AND THE LOCATION OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS THEN THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORDING TO THE ! POWER TRANSFORMER SHOULD BE INSTALLED BETWEEN
POWER TRANSFORMER CONNECTION GROUP MUST BE COM BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND FEEDER VOLTAGE
PENSATED 4HIS CAN BE DONE USING THE PARAMETER AD TRANSFORMERS
DRESS 
0OWER TRANSFORMER  K6  K6
4HE SECONDARY RATED VOLTAGES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS CONNECTION GROUP $YN 
FORMERS MUST BE EQUAL !DDITIONALLY THE PRIMARY
RATED VOLTAGES OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ON 4HE CONNECTION GROUP OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER IS
THE ONE HAND AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM DEFINED FROM THE UPPER VOLTAGE SIDE TO THE LOWER VOLT
AGE SIDE 4HE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS WHICH
ERS ON THE OTHER HAND MUST RELATE TO THE TRANSFOR
ARE THE REFERENCE VOLTAGES FOR THE PROTECTION RELAY
MATION RATIO OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER
ARE INSTALLED ON THE LOWER VOLTAGE SIDE OF THE POWER
TRANSFORMER 4HUS THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORD
)F NO PHASE SHIFTING ELEMENT ARE INSTALLED BETWEEN
ING TO THE CONNECTION GROUP NUMERAL IE  } ^
BUS BAR AN FEEDER VOLTAGES LEAVE ADDRESS  ON
MUST BE ENTERED AS NEGATIVE VALUE
THE PRESET VALUE   /THERWISE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT
THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT COUNTS POSITIVE FROM THE 3ETTING WILL BE ADDRESS 
FEEDER CIRCUIT TO THE BUS BAR CIRCUIT 0() 5 5  ^

0HASE DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN 5 FEEDER VOLTAGE AND


    5  5  ! . ' , 5 BUS BAR VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
 ^ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  ^
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  ^

4HE CLOSING TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS  5NDER ADDRESS  THE MINIMUM CLOSE COMMAND
IS NECESSARY IF THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION OF THE DURATION CAN BE SET 4HIS TIME IS THEN VALID FOR ALL
RELAY IS USED ALSO FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING )N THIS FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE WHICH CAN CLOSE THE CIRCUIT
CASE THE RELAY CALCULATES THE IDEAL CLOSING INSTANT BREAKER )T MUST BE LONG ENOUGH TO ENSURE RELIABLE
SUCH THAT THE TWO VOLTAGES BUS BAR AND FEEDER ARE CLOSURE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER !N EXCESSIVELY LONG
IN SYNCHRONISM AT THE INSTANT WHEN THE BREAKER TIME DOES NOT PRESENT ANY DANGER SINCE THE CLOSING
POLES CONTACT EACH OTHER COMMAND WILL BE INTERRUPTED AT ONCE ON OCCURRENCE
OF A RENEWED TRIP COMMAND

#IRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME RELEVANT ONLY IN CASE


    4 # " # , / 3 % ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS USED IN CONNECTION WITH
    S SYNCHRO CHECK
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S
 S

-AXIMUM DURATION OF CLOSE COMMAND


    4 # , / 3 %
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH A FAULT DATA STORE SEE 4HE FAULT DATA STORE CAN BE ACTIVATED EITHER BY EACH
3ECTION   4HIS FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE FAULT DETECTION OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION OR ONLY BY IN
PROVIDED THE CONFIGURATION PARAMETER ADDRESS STANTANEOUS TRIP IE WITHIN A SETTABLE TIME 4 2%#
 OF FAULT RECORDING HAS BEEN SET TO %8)34 3EC ADDRESS   !DDITIONALLY ONE CAN SELECT WHETHER
TION   THE DATA OF THE FAULT DATA STORE WILL BE OUTPUT TO THE
OPERATOR INTERFACE ON THE FRONT 0#0$ OR TO THE ,3!
INTERFACE ,3!

   
"EGINNING OF BLOCK &AULT RECORDINGS
& ! 5 , 4 2 % # / 2 $ ) . ' 3

    & ! 5 , 4 2 % #  &AULT RECORDING IS


/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & & /&& SWITCHED OFF

)NITIATION OF FAULT RECORD STORAGE


    ) . ) 4 ) ! 4 ) / .
" 9 & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % #  "9 EACH &!5,4 $%4%#TION

" 9 4 2 ) 0  4 2 % # "9 42)0 COMMAND  4 2%# IE INSTANTANE


OUS TRIP WITHIN A TIME 4 2%# ADDRESS 

4/ 0#0$ &AULT RECORDS SWITCHED TO THE OPERAT


    & ! 5 , 4 2 % #  ING INTERFACE CONNECTOR AT THE FRONT
4 / 0 #  0 $ PERSONAL COMPUTER OR PROGRAMMING
DEVICE
4 / , 3 ! 4/ ,3! &AULT RECORDS SWITCHED TO THE ,3!
INTERFACE CONNECTOR

4IME PERIOD WITHIN WHICH TRIP COMMAND MUST HAVE


    4 2 % #
BEEN ISSUED FOR INITIATION OF A FAULT RECORD STORAGE
    S ADDRESS 
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS BLOCK 

!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS EFFECTIVE ONLY IF CONFIGURED 4HE DURATION OF THE CLOSING COMMAND HAS ALREADY
AS %8)34 UNDER ADDRESS  REFER TO 3ECTION BEEN SET WHEN SETTING THE GENERAL PARAMETERS AD
  DRESS  3ECTION  

7ITH THE !2 FUNCTION GENERALLY DISTINCTION IS MADE ! PREREQUISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS THAT
BETWEEN THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IDENTIFIED IN THE FOLLOW THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR AT LEAST ONE TRIP CLOSE
ING WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE AND FURTHER CYCLE WHEN THE FEEDER PROTECTION TRIPS 4HIS INFORMA
!2 CYCLES WITH MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IDENTI TION HAS TO BE GIVEN TO THE RELAY VIA THE BINARY INPUT
FIED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED AUTO RECLO #" READY &.O   )N CASE SUCH INFORMATION IS
SURE  4HE ABOVE IDENTIFICATIONS ARE REGARDLESS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE #" CIRCUIT INTERROGATION OF
WHETHER THE DEAD TIMES ARE REALLY RAPID OR #" READY CAN BE SUPPRESSED BY SETTING THE PA
DELAYED  3ETTING ADDRESSES  TO  ARE COM RAMETER #"  42)0  ./ IE #" INTERROGATION FOR
MON FOR ALL TYPES OF AUTO RECLOSURE ST TRIP  OTHERWISE RECLOSURE WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE
AT ALL
7HEN SWITCHING MANUALLY ON A DEAD FAULT IT IS NOR
MALLY DESIRED THAT THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO INTERROGATE READINESS OF
INSTANTANEOUSLY AND THE !2 FUNCTION IS BLOCKED THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE EACH FURTHER RECLOSE COM
4HUS ADDRESS  SHOULD REMAIN IN POSITION MAND OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE COMMAND 3ET
-!.#,",  9%3 TING IS MADE IN ADDRESS 

4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- ADDRESS  IS THE #" #,/3%  #" 7)4( %!#( !2 INTERROGATION IS
TIME PERIOD AFTER WHICH THE NETWORK FAULT IS SUP MADE BEFORE EACH RECLOSE COM
POSED TO BE TERMINATED AFTER A SUCCESSFUL AUTO RE MAND
CLOSE CYCLE ! RENEWED TRIP OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION
WITHIN THIS TIME INCREMENTS THE !2 COUNTER WHEN #" #,/3%  #" .%6%2 INTERROGATION IS NOT
MULTI SHOT !2 IS USED SO THAT THE NEXT !2 CYCLE MADE OR ONLY AT THE MOMENT OF THE
STARTS IF NO FURTHER !2 IS ALLOWED THE LAST !2 IS TREATED FIRST TRIP COMMAND AS PARAMETERIZED
AS UNSUCCESSFUL UNDER ADDRESS 

4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4",/#+ $9. ADDRESS  IS #" #,/3%  #" 7)4( ND !2 INTERROGATION IS
THE TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL MADE BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE
AUTO RECLOSURE FURTHER RECLOSURES BY 6+ ARE COMMAND IE BEFORE THE ND TH
BLOCKED )F THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND IS LED VIA THE ETC EVERY TRIP CLOSE CYCLE IS VALID
6+ THEN THIS WILL BE BLOCKED ALSO 4HIS TIME MUST REGARDLESS WHETHER IT IS 2!2 OR $!2
BE LONGER THAN THE RENEWED READINESS FOR OPERATION
OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER UNLESS THE #" IS SUPERVISED IN )N ORDER TO MONITOR THE REGENERATION TIME OF THE CIR
THE RELAY SEE BELOW ADDRESS   )F THIS TIME IS SET CUIT BREAKER A SPECIAL CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
TO 0 BREAKER CLOSE COMMANDS ARE LOCKED )N THIS TIME 4 #" 3506 CAN BE SET UNDER ADDRESS 
CASE SWITCHING CAN BE UNLOCKED ONLY WHEN THE 4HIS TIME SHOULD BE SET SLIGHTLY HIGHER THAN THE RE
BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET &.O  IS ENERGIZED )T GENERATION TIME OF THE BREAKER AFTER A TRIP CLOSE
MUST BE ENSURED IN THIS CASE THAT THIS FUNCTION IS AL CYCLE )F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER THIS
LOCATED TO A BINARY INPUT TIME RECLOSURE IS SUPPRESSED

4HE SET TIME FOR 4",/#+ -# ADDRESS  MUST &INALLY ADDRESS  DETERMINES FOR WHICH RECLOSE
COVER THE TIME FOR SAFE CLOSING AND OPENING OF THE CIR CYCLES SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE SHALL BE CHECKED BY
CUIT BREAKER  S TO  S  )F THE FEEDER PROTECTION DE THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IF FITTED AND USED  )N
TECTS A FAULT WITHIN THIS TIME THREE POLE FINAL TRIP THE CASES WHICH ARE SET THERE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
COMMAND IS ISSUED AND RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED PRO AS LONG AS THE CONDITIONS AS SET FOR THE SYNCHRO
VIDED -!.#,", ADDRESS  SEE ABOVE IS CHECK FUNCTION ARE NOT FULFILLED
SWITCHED /.

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

    ! 5 4 / "EGINNING OF BLOCK
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS
2 % # , / 3 % & 5 . # 4 ) / .

    ! 2 & 5 . # 4 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS


/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & & /&& SWITCHED OFF

    - ! .  # ,  " ,  "LOCKING OF RECLOSING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE OF THE CIRCUIT


BREAKER
9 % 3 NORMAL SETTING 9%3

. /

2ECLAIM TIME AFTER SUCCESSFUL !2 CYCLE


    4 2 % # , ! ) -
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

,OCK OUT TIME AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 ANY CLOSE COM


    4 " , / # + $ 9 .
MAND IS BLOCKED
    S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S
AND 0 LOCKED UNTIL !2 2ESET VIA BINARY INPUT

2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSING OF CIRCUIT BREAKER


    4 " , / # + -  #  S
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

#" READY INTERROGATION AT THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND


    # "   4 2 ) 0
9 % 3 9%3 NORMAL SETTING

. / ./ ONLY IF THERE IS NO POSSIBILITY TO INTERROGATE #"


READINESS

    # "  # , / 3 % #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE RECLOSING


# "  . % 6 % 2 .%6%2 NO #" READY INTERROGATION BE
FORE RECLOSING
# "  7 ) 4 ( % ! # ( ! 2 7)4( %!#( !2 #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
EACH RECLOSING
# "  7 ) 4 (  N D ! 2 7)4( %!#( ND !2 #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
ND TH TH ETC RECLOSING
2!2 OR $!2

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

    4 # " 3 5 0 6 #" SUPERVISION TIME WITHIN WHICH #" MUST BE READY


3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

2EQUEST FOR SYNCHRO CHECK INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL IS


    3 9 .  # ( +  0 2 MADE
/ . , 9 " % & / 2 % $ ! 2 ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2

" % & / 2 %  0 / , % ! 2 BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE AFTER THREE POLE TRIPPING

" % & / 2 %  N D $ ! 2 ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2 FROM THE ND
$!2 SHOT ON
. % 6 % 2 NO REQUEST FOR SYNCHRO CHECK

&OR 2!2 FIRST AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE SEVERAL PRO CHECK FUNCTION IS USED A LONGER TIME CAN OFTEN BE
GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS   TOLERATED

7HEN SETTING THE ACTION TIME 2!2 4 !#4 ADDRESS 4HE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE TREATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS
 IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT THIS TIME IS AT LEAST AS HAVE BEEN DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION  4HE
LONG AS THE COMMAND TIME OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY IN RECOGNITION OF AN EVOLVING FAULT CAN BE MADE DEPEN
CLUDING ANY POSSIBLE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TIMES BUT DENT UPON A TRIPPING COMMAND OR UPON FAULT DETEC
SMALLER THAN THE DELAYED BACK UP STAGE OF THE FEED TION DURING THE DEAD TIME ADDRESS   4HE REAC
ER PROTECTION USUALLY  S  TION TO EVOLVING FAULTS IS SET IN ADDRESS  BLOCK
ING IN THE CASE OF AN EVOLVING FAULT EITHER OCCURS !,
7ITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE THE DEAD TIME 7!93 IE WITH EACH EVOLVING FAULT OR .%6%2 AT ALL OR
2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS  MUST BE LONG ENOUGH BLOCKING OCCURS ONLY AFTER THE FAULT IS DETECTED AFTER
THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4$)3#2 WHICH HAS TO BE
TO ENSURE THAT THE FAULT ARC IS EXTINGUISHED AND THE AIR
SET IN ADDRESS  "LOCKING IN THESE CASES OCCURS
SURROUNDING THE ARC IS DE IONIZED SO THAT AUTO RE
EVEN WHEN THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS PER
CLOSURE CAN BE SUCCESSFUL "ECAUSE OF THE DIS
MITTED
CHARGE AND RE CHARGE OF THE CONDUCTOR CAPACI
TANCES THIS TIME INCREASES WITH THE LENGTH OF THE LINE !LSO FOR THE TREATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS AND FOR THE
#ONVENTIONAL VALUES LIE BETWEEN  S AND  S DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2 THE STABILITY OF THE NET
WORK IS OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE )N ADDITION THE DY
7ITH THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS  NAMIC BURDEN OF THE GENERATORS MUST BE TAKEN INTO
THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK IS THE MOST IMPORTANT CON ACCOUNT IN THE CASE OF FAULTS CLOSE TO A LARGE POWER
SIDERATION 3INCE THE DISCONNECTED LINE CAN NO LONG STATION &OR THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2 AD
ER PRODUCE ANY SYNCHRONIZING POWER ONLY A SHORT DRESS  IT IS ONLY MEANINGFUL TO CHOSE A VALUE
DEAD TIME IS PERMITTED IN MOST CASES #ONVENTIONAL WHICH IS SMALLER THAN THE DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE
VALUES LIE BETWEEN  S AND  S )F THE SYNCHRO !2 2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS  

!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2


    2 ! 2 0 2 / ' 2  4(2%% 0/,% FOR EACH TYPE OF FAULT
4 ( 2 % % 0 / , % THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3).',% 0/,% SINGLE POLE !2
3 ) . ' , % 0 / , % FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS NO RECLOSURE
TAKES PLACE !2 BLOCKED
3 ) . ' , %  4 ( 2 % % 0 / , 3).',% FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS SINGLE POLE
4(2%% 0/,E !2 FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS THREE
POLE !2

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

!CTION TIME FOR 2!2 FIRST !2 SHOT IF TRIP SIGNAL


    2 ! 2 4 ! # 4 
IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
    S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S
AND 0

    2 ! 2 4  0 / , $EAD TIME FOR FIRST THREE POLE 2!2 CYCLE


3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

    2 ! 2 4  0 / , $EAD TIME FOR FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2 SINGLE POLE


3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

2ECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH SINGLE POLE


    % 6  &  2 % # / ' !2
" 9 4 2 ) 0 # / - - ! . $ "9 42)0 #/--!.$ FAULTS DURING SINGLE POLE
DEAD TIME ARE RECOGNIZED AS
" 9 & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % #  EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WHEN THE
RELAY TRIPS
"9 &!5,4 $%4%#TION EACH FAULT DETECTION DURING
SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME IS REC
OGNIZED AS AN EVOLVING FAULT

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH POLE !2


    % 6  &  " , / # + EACH EVOLVING FAULT RESULTS IN FINAL THREE POLE TRIP
! , 7 ! 9 3 RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
NO BLOCKING OF RECLOSURE IN THE CASE OF EVOLVING
. % 6 % 2 FAULTS A CHANGE FROM SINGLE POLE !2 TO THREE
POLE !2 OCCURS WHEN PERMITTED
 4 $ ) 3 # 2  BEFORE EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2 A CHANGE TO THREE
POLE !2 WHEN PERMITTED OCCURS
AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2 RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED

$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH


    4 $ ) 3 # 2 
SINGLE POLE !2
    S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

&OR $!2 FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES SEVERAL PRO -ULTIPLE AUTO RECLOSURE WITH LONGER THREE POLE
GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS   $!2 CAN BE EX DEAD TIMES ARE ONLY PERMITTED IN NETWORKS IN WHICH
CLUDED $!2 02/'  ./ $!2  $!2 CAN BE PER NO STABILITY PROBLEMS ARE TO BE EXPECTED FOR EX
MITTED ALSO IF NO 2!2 HAS BEEN PRECEDED $!2 AMPLE DUE TO A HIGH DEGREE OF MESHING OR IN RADIAL
02/'  $!2 7)4(/54 2!2  $!2 CAN BE PER NETWORKS OR IF SYNCHRO CHECK IS USED REFER TO 3EC
MITTED ONLY AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 $!2 02/' TION  
 $!2 !&4%2 2!2  $!2 IS ALWAYS THREE POLE

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4HE NUMBER OF $!2S CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY FOR $IFFERENT DEAD TIMES CAN BE SET FOR THE FIRST SECOND
SINGLE PHASE FAULTS ADDRESS  AND FOR MULTI AND THIRD TRIP CLOSE CYCLE 4HE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST
PHASE FAULTS ADDRESS   .EVERTHELESS TRIP OC CYCLE ADDRESS  IS ONLY VALID IF THE $!2 CYCLE IS
CURS ALWAYS THREE POLE REALLY THE FIRST CYCLE IE 2!2 IS SUPPRESSED  &OR THE
SECOND ADDRESS  AND THIRD ADDRESS 
&OR $!2 A SEPARATE ACTION TIME $!2 4 !#4 CAN BE CYCLE A 2!2 COUNTS ONLY IF IT HAS OCCURRED &URTHER
SET ADDRESS   CYCLES ARE TREATED AS THE THIRD CYCLE

!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR $!2 CYCLES


    $ ! 2 0 2 / ' 
. / $ ! 2 ./ $!2 NO DELAYED !2

$!2 7)4(/54 2!2 $!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ALSO


$ ! 2 7 ) 4 ( / 5 4 2 ! 2 WHEN NO 2!2 HAS PRECEDED

$ ! 2 ! & 4 % 2 2 ! 2 $!2 !&4%2 2!2 $!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY


AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
CYCLE

.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER SINGLE


    $ ! 2 . O   0 (
PHASE FAULTS THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER
 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE 

.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER MULTI PHASE


    $ ! 2 . O   0 (
FAULTS THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER
 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE 

!CTION TIME FOR $!2 FURTHER !2 SHOTS IF TRIP SIGNAL


    $ ! 2 4 ! # 4 
IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
    S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S
AND 0

$EAD TIME FORTHE FIRST !2 CYCLE IF IT IS A $!2 CYCLE


    $ ! 2 4  0 / , 
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

$EAD TIME FOR THE SECOND !2 CYCLE


    $ ! 2 4  0 / , 
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

$EAD TIME FOR FURTHER !2 CYCLES


    $ ! 2 4  0 / , 
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
    S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ADDRESS BLOCK 

3YNCHRONISM AN VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS EFFECTIVE 5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK  3ETTING IS IN
ONLY IF CONFIGURED AS %8)34 UNDER ADDRESS  RE VOLTS SECONDARY DEPENDENT OF THE CONNECTION OF THE
FER TO 3ECTION   VOLTAGES PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH THE PHA
SE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE IS DECISIVE
$IFFERENT INTERROGATION CONDITIONS CAN BE PARAMETER
IZED FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE ON ONE HAND AND FOR 4HE VOLTAGE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE
MANUAL CLOSURE ON THE OTHER HAND GARDED SAFELY AS LIVE IS SET UNDER ADDRESS  5
FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK  )T MUST BE SET BELOW
4HE GENERAL LIMIT VALUES FOR CLOSURE ARE SET UNDER AD THE MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE UNDER NORMAL CONDI
DRESSES  TO  !DDITIONALLY ADDRESSES  TIONS 3ETTING IS IN VOLTS SECONDARY DEPENDENT OF THE
TO  ARE RELEVANT FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE AD CONNECTION OF THE VOLTAGES PHASE PHASE OR PHA
DRESSES  TO  ARE RELEVANT FOR MANUAL CLO SE EARTH THE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH VOLT
SURE AGE IS DECISIVE

4HE COMPLETE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNC 4HE PERMISSIBLE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE —5 BETWEEN
TION IS SWITCHED /&& OR /. UNDER ADDRESS  THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS  $%,4! 5
3ETTING IS IN VOLTS SECONDARY DEPENDENT OF THE CON
NECTION OF THE VOLTAGES PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
 7ARNING EARTH THE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE IS
)F SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED DECISIVE
OFF ADDRESS  EACH MANUAL OR AUTOMAT
IC CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT WITHOUT SYNCHRO 4HE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE —F BETWEEN
NISM CHECK THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS  $%,4! F

4HE VOLTAGE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE 4HE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE —„ BETWEEN
GARDED SAFELY AS DEAD IS SET UNDER ADDRESS  THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS  $%,4! 0()

    # ( % # + "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE


3 9 . # ( 2 / . ) 3 - CHECK

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION COMPLETE IS


    3 9 . # # ( % # +
/. SWITCHED ON
/ .
/FF SWITCHED OFF
/ & &

6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR


    5  CAN BE REGARDED AS DEAD PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
 6 EARTH IN 6
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 6
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  6

6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR


    5  CAN BE REGARDED AS LIVE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
  6 EARTH IN 6
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  6
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  6

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

,IMIT VALUE —5 FOR THE PERMISSIBLE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE IN


    $ % , 4 ! 5  MAGNITUDE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH IN 6
 6 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 6
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  6

,IMIT VALUE —F FOR THE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE


    $ % , 4 ! F  IN (Z
    ( Z 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  (Z
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  (Z

,IMIT VALUE —„ FOR THE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFER


    $ % , 4 ! 0 ( )  ENCE IN ^
  ^ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ^
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  ^

4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IN QUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN THE NETWORKS ARE
6+ CAN ALSO GIVE CLOSING COMMAND IN ASYNCH REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE THIS FREQUENCY DIF
RONOUS NETWORKS )N THIS CASE CLOSING COMMAND IS FERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS CARRIED OUT UNDER
GIVEN SUCH THAT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE CIRCUIT CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE FRE
BREAKER CLOSING TIME ADDRESS  THE VOLTAGE QUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
PHASORS OF THE LINE AND BUS BAR VOLTAGES AGREE IN TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE THE SYNCHRO
PHASE AT THE INSTANT WHEN THE BREAKER POLES TOUCH CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER ADDRESSES 
EACH OTHER  AND  ARE ONLY RELEVANT 4HE SETTING VALUE
OF ADDRESS  MUST LIE BELOW THAT OF ADDRESS 
&OR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE ADDRESS  )F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS SUPPRESSED
$%,F39.# DEFINES THE LIMIT WITHIN WHICH THE FRE FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

,IMIT VALUE —F FOR SYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE


    $ % ,  F  3 9 . #  (Z
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE
0 ( Z ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  (Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE

4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOS  55 DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK
ING ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES  TO  THE FEEDER 5 AND THE BUS BAR
5 MUST BOTH BE DEAD 5 REFER
 39.#(2 SYNCHRO CHECK THE CONDITIONS TO ADDRESS  
FOR SYNCHRONISM —5 —F AND —„
ARE CHECKED BEFORE RECLOSURE  /6%22)$% AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE IS RELEASED
WITHOUT ANY CHECK
 55 DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEEDER
5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER AD 4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN
DRESS  THE BUS BAR 5 DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE COMBINED
MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER TO AD
DRESS  

 55 DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEEDER


5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER AD
DRESS  THE BUS BAR 5
MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER TO ADDRESS
 

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3YNCHRO CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE


    3 9 . # ( 2 
9 % 3 9%3

. / ./

$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE


    5   5  
. / ./

9%3
9 % 3

$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE


    5   5  
. / ./

9%3
9 % 3

$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RE


    5   5   CLOSURE
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE


    / 6 % 2 2 ) $ %
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING  -# 39.#(2 SYNCHRO CHECK THE CONDI
ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES  TO  4HE SYN TIONS FOR SYNCHRONISM —5 —F
CHRO CHECK FUNCTION FOR MANUAL CLOSING CAN BE INDI AND —„ ARE CHECKED BEFORE
VIDUALLY SWITCHED OFF OR ON UNDER ADDRESS  RECLOSURE
7HEN 39.-!.#, IS SWITCHED /&& NO CHECKS ARE  -# 55 DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEED
CARRIED OUT FOR MANUAL CLOSING ER 5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
TO ADDRESS  THE BUS
! SEPARATE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMIT CAN BE SET FOR BAR 5 MUST BE DEAD 5
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE COM REFER TO ADDRESS  
MAND !DDRESS  -# $F39. DEFINES THE LIMIT  -# 55 DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEED
WITHIN WHICH THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN ER 5 MUST BE DEAD 5 RE
THE NETWORKS ARE REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE FER ADDRESS  THE BUS
THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS BAR 5 MUST BE LIVE 5 RE
CARRIED OUT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE FER TO ADDRESS  
DIFFERENCE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT  -# 55 DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS
BREAKER CLOSING TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFER CHECK THE FEEDER 5 AND
ENCE THE SYNCHRO CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER THE BUS BAR 5 MUST BOTH
ADDRESSES   AND  ARE ONLY RELEVANT BE DEAD 5 REFER TO AD
4HE SETTING VALUE OF ADDRESS  MUST LIE BELOW DRESS  
THAT OF ADDRESS  )F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS
 -# /2)$% MANUAL CLOSING IS RELEASED
SWITCHING IS SUPPRESSED FOR MANUAL CLOSURE
WITHOUT ANY CHECK
4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING 4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN
ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES  TO  DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE COMBINED

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE


    3 9 .  - ! .  # , COMMAND IS
/ . /. SWITCHED ON

/ & & /&& SWITCHED OFF

,IMIT VALUE —F FOR SYNCHRONOUS MANUAL CLOSURE


    -  # $ F  3 9 . 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  (Z
0 ( Z ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  (Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS MANUAL SWITCHING

3YNCHRO CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE


    -  # 3 9 . # ( 2
9 % 3 9%3

. / ./

$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE


    -  # 5   5  
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE


    -  # 5   5  
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLO


    -  # 5   5   SURE
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE


    -  # /  2 ) $ %
. / ./

9 % 3 9%3

&INALLY ADDRESS  DETERMINES THE TIME PERIOD WELL AS FOR MANUAL CLOSURE 7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE
BEGINNING FROM THE MEASURING REQUEST WITHIN WHICH NOT FULFILLED WITHIN THIS TIME CLOSING IS BLOCKED /NLY
THE CHECK CONDITIONS AS PARAMETERIZED MUST BE FUL AFTER A RENEWED MEASURING REQUEST THE TIME STARTS
FILLED 4HIS TIME IS VALID FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE AS AGAIN AND A NEW CHECK IS CARRIED OUT

3UPERVISION TIME PERIOD WITHIN WHICH THE CHECK CONDI


    4 3 9 .  3 5 0 6 TIONS MUST BE FULFILLED
    S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE  S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE  S

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 !NNUNCIATIONS

 )NTRODUCTION 0RESS KEY -3 - STANDS FOR MESSAGES 3 FOR


SIGNALS  THEN THE ADDRESS  APPEARS AUTO
!FTER A NETWORK FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS AND MESSAGES MATICALLY AS THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION
PROVIDE A SURVEY OF IMPORTANT FAULT DATA AND THE FUNC BLOCKS
TION OF THE RELAY AND SERVE FOR CHECKING SEQUENCES
OF FUNCTIONAL STEPS DURING TESTING AND COMMISSION &OR CONFIGURATION OF THE TRANSFER OF ANNUNCIATIONS TO
ING &URTHER THEY PROVIDE INFORMATION ABOUT THE CON A CENTRAL PROCESSING DEVICE OR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION
DITION OF MEASURED DATA AND THE RELAY ITSELF DURING AUTOMATION SYSTEM THE NECESSARY DATA ARE ENTERED
NORMAL OPERATION IN BLOCK  SEE 3ECTION  

4O READ OUT RECORDED ANNUNCIATIONS NO CODEWORD 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS
INPUT IS NECESSARY
"LOCK  /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS THESE ARE
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS GENERATED IN THE RELAY ARE PRES MESSAGES WHICH CAN APPEAR DURING THE
ENTED IN VARIOUS WAYS OPERATION OF THE RELAY INFORMATION ABOUT
CONDITION OF RELAY FUNCTIONS MEASURE
,%$ INDICATIONS IN THE FRONT PLATE OF THE RELAY &IG MENT DATA ETC
URE 
"LOCK  %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST FAULT
"INARY OUTPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIA THE CONNECTIONS PICK UP TRIP RECLOSURE EXPIRED TIMES OR
OF THE RELAY SIMILAR !S DEFINED A NETWORK FAULT BEGINS
WITH PICK UP OF ANY FAULT DETECTOR )F AU
)NDICATIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PLATE OR ON TO RECLOSE IS CARRIED OUT THE NETWORK
THE SCREEN OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER VIA THE OPERAT FAULT ENDS AFTER EXPIRY OF THE LAST RECLAIM
ING INTERFACE TIME THUS AN !2 SHOT OR ALL SHOTS
OCCUPY ONLY ONE FAULT DATA STORE 7ITHIN A
4RANSMISSION VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE TO LOCAL OR RE NETWORK FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS CAN OC
MOTE CONTROL FACILITIES OPTIONAL  CUR FROM PICK UP OF ANY PROTECTION UNTIL
DROP OFF
-OST OF THESE ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE RELATIVELY FREELY
ALLOCATED TO THE ,%$S AND BINARY OUTPUTS SEE 3EC "LOCK  %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE PREVIOUS NET
TION   !LSO WITHIN SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS GROUP AND WORK FAULT AS BLOCK 
MULTIPLE INDICATIONS CAN BE FORMED
"LOCK  %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST BUT TWO
4O CALL UP ANNUNCIATIONS ON THE OPERATOR PANEL THE NETWORK FAULT AS BLOCK 
FOLLOWING POSSIBILITIES EXIST
"LOCK  !NNUNCIATIONS FOR #" OPERATION STATISTICS
"LOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK THAT IS COUNTERS FOR FIRST !2 2!2 SECOND
WARDS UP TO ADDRESS  OR FURTHER !2 $!2 

$IRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY $! "LOCK  )NDICATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VAL
ADDRESS     AND EXECUTE WITH KEY % UES VOLTAGES FREQUENCY 

    #OMMENCEMENT OF ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS


! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3

! COMPREHENSIVE LIST OF THE POSSIBLE ANNUNCIATIONS AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER
&.O IS GIVEN IN !PPENDIX # )T IS ALSO INDICATED TO WHICH DEVICE EACH ANNUNCIATION CAN BE ROUTED

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK 

/PERATIONAL AND STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS CONTAIN INFOR !FTER SELECTION OF THE ADDRESS  BY DIRECT SELEC
MATION WHICH THE UNIT PROVIDES DURING OPERATION AND TION WITH $!     % ANDOR PAGING WITH Å OR Ç
ABOUT THE OPERATION 4HEY BEGIN AT ADDRESS  AND FURTHER SCROLLING ! OR " THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCI
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND STATUS CHANGES ARE CHRONO ATIONS APPEAR 4HE BOXES BELOW SHOW ALL AVAILABLE
LOGICALLY LISTED STARTING WITH THE MOST RECENT MES OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS )N EACH SPECIFIC CASE OF
SAGE 4IME INFORMATION IS SHOWN IN HOURS AND MIN COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS APPEAR IN
UTES 5P TO  OPERATIONAL INDICATIONS CAN BE STORED THE DISPLAY
)F MORE OCCUR THE OLDEST ARE ERASED IN SEQUENCE
.EXT TO THE BOXES BELOW THE ABBREVIATED FORMS ARE
&AULTS IN THE NETWORK ARE ONLY INDICATED AS 3YSTEM EXPLAINED )T IS INDICATED WHETHER AN EVENT IS AN
&LT TOGETHER WITH THE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF THE NOUNCED ON OCCURRENCE #  #OMING OR A STATUS
FAULT $ETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE HISTORY OF THE IS ANNOUNCED #OMING AND 'OING #' 
FAULT IS CONTAINED IN BLOCKS &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS  RE
4HE FIRST LISTED MESSAGE IS AS EXAMPLE ASSIGNED
FER TO 3ECTION 
WITH DATE AND TIME IN THE FIRST LINE THE SECOND LINE
SHOWS AN EVENT WITH THE CHARACTER # TO INDICATE THAT
4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED
THIS CONDITION OCCURRED AT THE DISPLAYED TIME

    / 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . ! , "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL


ANNUNCIATIONS
! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3

ST LINE $ATE AND TIME OF THE EVENT OR STATUS


             CHANGE
, % $ R E S E T  #
ND LINE !NNUNCIATION TEXT IN THE EXAMPLE #OMING

)F THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS NOT AVAILABLE THE DATE IS REPLACED BY JJJJJJ THE TIME IS GIVEN AS RELATIVE TIME FROM THE
LAST RE START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM

$IRECT RESPONSE FROM BINARY INPUTS

 - A N U A L # L O S E -ANUAL CLOSE SIGNAL FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH #'

 5  6 4 M C B 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER VTS


TRIPPED #'
 5  6 4 M C B 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR VTS
TRIPPED #'
 # " ! U X  ,  #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT POLE , CLOSED #'

 # " ! U X  ,  #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT POLE , CLOSED #'

 # " ! U X  ,  #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT POLE , CLOSED #'

 # " ! U X   P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ALL POLES CLOSED #'

 # " ! U X   P # #IRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ANY POLE CLOSED #'

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 ! N N U N C   5SER DEFINED ANNUNCIATION .O  RECEIVED VIA BINARY


INPUT #'
 ! N N U N C   5SER DEFINED ANNUNCIATION .O  RECEIVED VIA BINARY
INPUT #'
 ! N N U N C   5SER DEFINED ANNUNCIATION .O  RECEIVED VIA BINARY
INPUT #'
 ! N N U N C   5SER DEFINED ANNUNCIATION .O  RECEIVED VIA BINARY
INPUT #'
 3 Y N C  3 T A R T )NITIATION OF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
VIA BINARY INPUT #'
 3 Y N C  " L O C K 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION BLOCKED VIA
BINARY INPUT #'
 3 Y N C  S Y N C H 3YNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION PROGRAMMED VIA BINARY
INPUT TO CHECK SYNCHRONISM #'
 3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION PROGRAMMED VIA BINARY
INPUT TO CHECK LIVE LINE AND DEAD BUS #'
 3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION PROGRAMMED VIA BINARY
INPUT TO CHECK DEAD LINE AND LIVE BUS #'
 3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION PROGRAMMED VIA BINARY
INPUT TO CHECK DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS #'
 3 Y N C  O  R I D E 3YNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION PROGRAMMED VIA BINARY
INPUT TO OVERRIDE CHECK #'
 3 T A R T ! 2 3TARTING SIGNAL FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2 #'

 4 R I P ,  ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL POLE , FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2 #'

 4 R I P ,  ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL POLE , FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2 #'

 4 R I P ,  ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL POLE , FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2 #'

 4 R I P  P ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL SINGLE POLE FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2


#'
 4 R I P  P ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL THREE POLE FROM FEEDER PROTECTION FOR !2
#'
 ! 2 " L O C K 2!2 BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

 2 ! 2 " L O C K 2!2 BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

  P 2 ! 2 " L O C K 3INGLE POLE 2!2 BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

  P 2 ! 2 " L O C K 4HREE POLE 2!2 BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

 $ ! 2 B L O C K $!2 BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

 $ ! 2 A F T  2 ! 2 #ONTROL SIGNAL VIA BINARY INPUT $!2 PERMITTED ONLY


AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 #'
 # L O S E # M D  " L O !LL CLOSE COMMANDS BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

 ! 2 2 E S E T !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BLOCKED VIA BINARY INPUT #'

 # " 2 E A D Y #IRCUIT BREAKER READY INFORMATION VIA BINARY INPUT #


'

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

'ENERAL OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE DEVICE

2 E S T A R T 2E START ANNUNCIATION OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM #

3 Y S T  & L T .ETWORK FAULT # DETAILED INFORMATION IN THE FAULT AN


NUNCIATIONS
, % $ R E S E T 3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS RESET #

& L T  2 E C  O F F &AULT RECORDING SWITCHED OFF #'

0 A R A M  2 U N N I N G 0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET #'

- A N U A L # L O S E -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND REGISTERED IMPULSE #

0 A R A M  3 E T ! 0ARAMETER SET ! IS ACTIVE #'

0 A R A M  3 E T " 0ARAMETER SET " IS ACTIVE #'

0 A R A M  3 E T # 0ARAMETER SET # IS ACTIVE #'

0 A R A M  3 E T $ 0ARAMETER SET $ IS ACTIVE #'

!NNUNCIATIONS OF MONITORING FUNCTIONS

& A I L U R E   6 &AILURE IN INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE  6 #'

& A I L U R E   6 &AILURE IN INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE  6 #'

& A I L U R E  6 &AILURE IN INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE  6 #'

& A I L U R E  6 &AILURE IN OFFSET VOLTAGE  6 #'

& A I L U R E 2 + ! &AILURE ON INPUTOUTPUT MODULE 2+! #'

! N N U N C  , O S T !NNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW #

& L T  " U F F  / V E R "UFFER FOR FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS OVERFLOW #

/ P E R  ! N N  ) N V A /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #

& L T  ! N N  ) N V A L &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #

3 T A T  " U F F  ) N V "UFFER FOR OPERATION STATISTICS INVALID #'

, % $ " U F F  ) N V A "UFFER FOR STORED ,%$S INVALID #'

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

# H S  % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED #'

# H S  3  % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET !


NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'
# H S  3  % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER 3ET "
NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'
# H S  3  % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET #
NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'
# H S  3  % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET $
NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'

/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

! 2 O F F !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'

! 2 I N O P E R A T I V !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INOPERATIVE IE CANNOT BE INITI


ATED #'
# " N O T R E A D Y #IRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR TRIP CLOSE CYCLE #'

! 2 4 # " % X P  #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED #

! 2 " L O C K  $ Y N  !2 IS INTERNALLY DYNAMICALLY BLOCKED #'

 P 4 R I P 0 E R M  !2 PERMITS SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE MAIN PROTECTION


RELAY #'
2 ! 2 : O N E 2 E L  !2 RELEASES 2!2 ZONE OF THE MAIN PROTECTION RELAY
#'
$ ! 2 : O N E 2 E L  !2 RELEASES $!2 ZONE OF THE MAIN PROTECTION RELAY
#'

/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3 Y N C  O F F 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED


OFF #'
3 Y N C  R U N N I N G 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS RUNNING
#
3 Y N C  F A U L T Y 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS FAULTY #
'
3 Y N C  4 S U P % X P 4IME SUPERVISION OF SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION HAS
ELAPSED NO MORE CLOSE RELEASE POSSIBLE #
3 Y N C  / V E R R I D E 3YNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION SWITCHED TO PROGRAM /VER
RIDE IE CLOSE RELEASE WITHOUT ANY CHECK #'
3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION ,IVE LINE DEAD BUS IS
FULFILLED #'

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION $EAD LINE LIVE BUS IS


FULFILLED #'
3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION $EAD LINE DEAD BUS IS
FULFILLED #'
3 Y N C  3 Y N C H R O 3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION 3YNCHRONISM IS FULFILLED
#'
3 Y N C  " L O C K E D 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
#'
3 Y N C  2 E L E A S E #ONDITIONS FULFILLED 2ELEASE TO CLOSE #

3 Y N C  # L O S E # M D #LOSE COMMAND OF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK


FUNCTION #
3 Y N C  $ E L  5  3YNCHRO CHECK —5 EXCEEDED #'

3 Y N C  $ E L  F  3YNCHRO CHECK —F EXCEEDED #'

3 Y N C  $ E L  0 ( )  3YNCHRO CHECK —„ EXCEEDED #'

&URTHER MESSAGES

4 A B L E O V E R F L O W )F MORE MESSAGES HAVE BEEN RECEIVED THE LAST VALID


MESSAGE IS 4ABLE OVERFLOW
% N D O F T A B L E )F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS
%ND OF TABLE

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCKS  TO 

4HE ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH OCCURRED DURING THE LAST &OR THESE PURPOSES THE TERM SYSTEM FAULT MEANS
THREE NETWORK FAULTS CAN BE READ OFF ON THE FRONT PAN THE PERIOD FROM SHORT CIRCUIT INCEPTION UP TO FINAL
EL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HE INDICATIONS ARE CLEARANCE )F AUTO RECLOSE OCCURS THEN THE SYSTEM
RECORDED IN THE SEQUENCE FROM THE YOUNGEST TO THE FAULT IS FINISHED ON EXPIRY OF THE LAST RECLAIM OR LOCK
OLDEST UNDER ADDRESSES   AND  7HEN OUT TIME THAT IS AFTER SUCCESSFUL OR UNSUCCESSFUL !2
A FURTHER FAULT OCCURS THE DATA RELATING TO THE OLDEST 4HUS THE TOTAL FAULT CLEARANCE PROCEDURE INCLUSIVE
ARE ERASED %ACH FAULT DATA BUFFER CAN CONTAIN UP TO !2 CYCLES OCCUPIES ONLY ONE FAULT ANNUNCIATION
 ANNUNCIATIONS STORE 7ITHIN ONE SYSTEM FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS
CAN HAVE OCCURRED IE FROM PICK UP OF ANY FEEDER
)NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED PROTECTION UNTIL DROP OFF OF THE LAST PICK UP

4O CALL UP THE LAST FAULT DATA ONE GOES TO ADDRESS )N THE FOLLOWING CLARIFICATION ALL THE AVAILABLE FAULT AN
 EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESS $!     % OR BY NUNCIATIONS ARE INDICATED )N THE CASE OF A SPECIFIC
PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç  7ITH THE KEYS ! OR " ONE
FAULT OF COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS
CAN PAGE THE INDIVIDUAL ANNUNCIATIONS FORWARDS OR
APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY !T FIRST AN EXAMPLE IS GIVEN FOR
BACKWARDS %ACH ANNUNCIATION IS ASSIGNED WITH A
A SYSTEM FAULT AND EXPLAINED
SEQUENCE ITEM NUMBER

    , ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE LAST


SYSTEM FAULT
& ! 5 , 4

           UNDER ITEM  THE DATE OF THE SYSTEM FAULT IS INDICATED


PROVIDED THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS AVAILABLE IN THE SECOND
3 Y S T E M & L T   LINE THE CONSECUTIVE NUMBER OF THE SYSTEM FAULT

               UNDER ITEM  THE TIME OF THE BEGINNING OF THE FAULT IS GIV


EN PROVIDED THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS AVAILABLE  TIME RESO
& A U L T  # LUTION IS  MS

4HE FOLLOWING ITEMS INDICATE ALL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS


    M S WHICH HAVE OCCURRED FROM FAULT DETECTION UNTIL DROP OFF
! 2  P I N P R O G  # OF THE DEVICE IN CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE 4HESE ANNUN
CIATIONS ARE TAGGED WITH THE RELATIVE TIME IN MILLISECONDS
STARTING WITH THE FAULT DETECTION

     M S
2 ! 2 4  P R U N   #

       M S
! 2 # L O S E # M D  #

        M S
! 2 S U C C E S S F U L  #

ETC

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

'ENERAL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE DEVICE

3 Y S T  & L T 3YSTEM FAULT WITH CONSECUTIVE NUMBER

& A U L T "EGINNING OF FAULT

$ E V  $ R O P O F F $ROP OFF OF THE DEVICE GENERAL

!NNUNCIATION OF THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

! 2  P I N P R O G 3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS INITIATED

! 2  P I N P R O G 4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS INITIATED

! 2 " L O C K  $ Y N  !2 IS INTERNALLY DYNAMICALLY BLOCKED

 P 4 R I P 0 E R M  !2 PERMITS SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE MAIN PROTECTION


RELAY
2 ! 2 : O N E 2 E L  !2 RELEASES 2!2 ZONE OF THE MAIN PROTECTION RELAY

2 ! 2 4 ! C T  R U N !CTION TIME FOR 2!2 CYCLE IS RUNNING

2 ! 2 4  P R U N  3INGLE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 CYCLE IS RUNNING

2 ! 2 4  P R U N  4HREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 CYCLE IS RUNNING

$ ! 2 : O N E 2 E L  !2 RELEASES $!2 ZONE OF THE MAIN PROTECTION RELAY

$ ! 2 4 ! C T  R U N !CTION TIME FOR $!2 CYCLE IS RUNNING

$ ! 2 4  P  R U N &IRST THREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR $!2 CYCLE IS RUNNING

$ ! 2 4  P  R U N 3ECOND THREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR $!2 CYCLE IS RUN


NING
$ ! 2 4  P  R U N 4HIRD OR FURTHER THREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR $!2 CYCLE IS
RUNNING
! 2 4 2 E C L  R U N 2ECLAIM TIME FOR !2 IS RUNNING

! 2 4 # " % X P  #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED

% V  & L T  2 E C O G  %VOLVING FAULT IS RECOGNIZED

! 2 3 U C C E S S F U L !UTO RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFUL

$ E F I N I T  4 R I P $EFINITIVE FINAL TRIP COMMAND

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

# " ! L A R M 3 U P P 3UPPRESSION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM

3 Y N C  - E A S  3 T  3TART TO MEASURE SIGNAL TO SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE


CHECK FUNCTION
! 2 # L O S E # M D  !UTO RECLOSURE COMMAND

!NNUNCIATIONS OF THE MANUAL CLOSE FUNCTION

- A N U A L # L O S E -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND

!NNUNCIATIONS OF THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3 Y N C  R U N N I N G 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS RUNNING

3 Y N C  F A U L T Y 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS FAULTY

3 Y N C  4 S U P % X P 4IME SUPERVISION OF SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION HAS


ELAPSED NO MORE CLOSE RELEASE POSSIBLE
3 Y N C  / V E R R I D E 3YNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION SWITCHED TO PROGRAM /VER
RIDE IE CLOSE RELEASE WITHOUT ANY CHECK

3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION ,IVE LINE DEAD BUS IS


FULFILLED
3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION $EAD LINE LIVE BUS IS
FULFILLED
3 Y N C  5   5   3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION $EAD LINE DEAD BUS IS
FULFILLED
3 Y N C  3 Y N C H R O 3YNCHRO CHECK CONDITION 3YNCHRONISM IS FULFILLED

3 Y N C  " L O C K E D 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED

3 Y N C  2 E L E A S E #ONDITIONS FULFILLED 2ELEASE TO CLOSE

3 Y N C  $ E L  5  3YNCHRO CHECK —5 EXCEEDED

3 Y N C  $ E L  F  3YNCHRO CHECK —F EXCEEDED

3 Y N C  $ E L  0 ( )  3YNCHRO CHECK —„ EXCEEDED

3 Y N C  # L O S E # M D #LOSE COMMAND OF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK


FUNCTION

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

&URTHER MESSAGES

4 A B L E E M P T Y MEANS THAT NO FAULT EVENT HAS BEEN RECORDED

4 A B L E O V E R F L O W MEANS THAT OTHER FAULT DATA HAVE OCCURRED HOWEVER


MEMORY IS FULL
4 A B L E S U P E R C E D E D A NEW FAULT EVENT HAS OCCURRED DURING READ OUT
PAGE ON WITH ! OR " THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FIRST AN
NUNCIATION IN THE ACTUALIZED ORDER
% N D O F T A B L E )F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS
%ND OF TABLE

4HE DATA OF THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS  4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE
THE SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT

     N D 4 / , ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF


THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
& ! 5 , 4

ETC

4HE DATA OF THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS  4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE THE
SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT

     R D 4 / , ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF


THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
& ! 5 , 4

ETC

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE NUMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS IS COUNTED DRESS  IS REACHED 4HE COUNTERS CAN BE CALLED
SEPARATELY FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 THREE POLE 2!2 UP USING THE KEY ! FOR FORWARDS PAGING OR " FOR BACK
FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 FURTHER SHOTS  WARDS PAGING
#OUNTER STATUS ARE SECURED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
FAILURE AND CAN BE READ OFF UNDER ADDRESS  4HE %NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR READ OFF OF
ADDRESS CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $! COUNTER STATES
    % OR BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç UNTIL AD

    # " / 0 % 2 ! 4  "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION


STATISTICS
3 4 ! 4 ) 3 4 ) # 3

    2 ! 2  P O L E  .UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER SINGLE


  POLE TRIP EG 

0AGE ON WITH KEY ! TO GET FURTHER COUNTER STATES

.UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE


    2 ! 2  P O L E  POLE TRIP ST !2 CYCLE 2!2

    $ ! 2  P O L E  .UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE


POLE TRIP FURTHER !2 CYCLES $!2

4HE MAXIMUM VALUES OF THE COUNTERS ARE


2!2 POLE 2!2 POLE $!2 POLE  DIGITS

4HE COUNTERS CAN BE RESET TO  IN BLOCK  SEE 3ECTION  

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE STEADY STATE RMS OPERATING VALUES CAN BE READ 4HE DATA ARE DISPLAYED IN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY
OUT AT ANY TIME UNDER THE ADDRESS  4HE AD VALUES 4O ENSURE CORRECT PRIMARY VALUES THE RATED
DRESS CAN BE CALLED UP DIRECTLY USING $!     % DATA MUST BE ENTERED TO THE DEVICE UNDER ADDRESS
OR BY PAGING WITH Å OR Ç 4HE INDIVIDUAL MEASURED BLOCK  AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION 
VALUES CAN BE FOUND BY FURTHER PAGING WITH ! OR "
%NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE VALUES )N THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SOME TYPICAL VALUES HAVE
WILL BE UPDATED IN APPROXIMATELY  SECONDS INTER BEEN INSERTED )N PRACTICE THE ACTUAL VALUES APPEAR
VALS 6ALUES OUTSIDE THE OPERATION RANGE OF THE RELAY ARE
INDICATED WITH JJJJ

    / 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . ! , "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL MEASURED


VALUES
- % ! 3 5 2 % $ 6 ! , 5 % 3

5SE ! KEY TO MOVE TO THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE

0AGE ON WITH THE ! KEY TO READ OFF THE NEXT ADDRESS


    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 % WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE OR PAGE BACK WITH "
5        6
/NE ADDRESS IS AVAILABLE FOR EACH MEASURED VALUE
4HE VALUES CAN BE REACHED ALSO BY DIRECT ADDRESSING
    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 % USING KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS NUMBER AND
EXECUTE WITH %
5        6
4HE PRIMARY VALUES ADDRESSES  AND  ARE
RELATED TO THE PRIMARY RATED VALUES AS PARAMETERIZED
    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 % UNDER ADDRESSES  FOR 5. REFER TO 3ECTION
5  P R I M       K 6  

4HE VOLTAGES AND VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE ARE PHASE


PHASE OR PHASE EARTH DEPENDENT OF THE CONNECTED
    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 % VOLTAGE
5  P R I M       K 6

    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 %
F        ( Z

    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 %
F        ( Z

    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 %
D ? U      6

    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 %
D ? F      ( Z

    - % ! 3  6 ! , 5 %
D ? P H I    

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 /PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES

$URING OPERATION OF THE PROTECTION RELAY IT MAY BE DE )N ORDER TO CONTROL FUNCTIONS VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS
SIRED TO INTERVENE IN FUNCTIONS OR ANNUNCIATIONS MAN NECESSARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MAR
UALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRITERIA 6+ COMPRISES FACI SHALLED TO THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS
LITIES EG TO RE ADJUST THE REAL TIME CLOCK TO ERASE DURING INSTALLATION OF THE DEVICE AND THAT THEY HAVE
STORED INFORMATIONS AND EVENT COUNTERS TO SWITCH ON BEEN CONNECTED REFER TO 3ECTION  -ARSHALLING
OR OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OR OF THE BINARY INPUTS 
TO CHANGE OVER PRESELECTED SETS OF FUNCTION PARAME
4HE CONTROL FACILITIES BEGIN WITH ADDRESS BLOCK 
TERS
4HIS ADDRESS IS REACHED
4HE FUNCTIONS CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM THE OPERATING BY BLOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç
PANEL ON THE FRONT OF THE DEVICE VIA THE OPERATING IN BACKWARDS UP TO ADDRESS  OR
TERFACE IN THE FRONT AS WELL AS VIA BINARY INPUTS
BY DIRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY
$! ADDRESS     AND EXECUTE WITH KEY %

    $ % 6 ) # % "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $EVICE CONTROL


# / . 4 2 / ,

 !DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE ADJUSTED AT ANY TIME DUR 3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER
ING OPERATION AS LONG AS THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS OPERA SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
TIVE 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK  WHICH IS TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $!     % OR BY
PAGING WITH Å AND Ç )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS RE
QUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA

    3 % 4 4 ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK 


2 % ! , 4 ) - % # , / # + #ONTINUE WITH !

          !T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED


#ONTINUE WITH !
       

%NTER THE NEW DATE  DIGITS FOR DAY  DIGITS FOR MONTH
    $ ! 4 % AND  DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY  USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS  3ECTION  BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999

    4 ) - % %NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH


WITH  DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33

5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY


    $ ) & &  4 ) - % THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE  KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 %RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS ADDRESS BLOCK 

4HE STATISTICAL INDICATIONS 3ECTION  ADDRESS TION OF RESETTING THE ,%$ INDICATIONS ADDRESS 
 ARE STORED IN %%02/-S IN THE DEVICE 4HEY CODEWORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY TO ERASE THE STORED
ARE NOT THEREFORE ERASED IF THE AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY ITEMS 2ESET IS SEPARATE FOR THE DIFFERENT GROUPS OF
FAILS !DDITIONALLY ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE STATUS OF COUNTERS MEMORIES AND ANNUNCIATIONS /NE REACH
THE ,%$ MEMORIES ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S AND THUS ES THE INDIVIDUAL ITEMS BY PAGING ! " %RASURE RE
SAVED PROVIDED THE BACK UP BATTERY IS INSTALLED QUIRES CONFIRMATION WITH THE KEY *9 4HE DISPLAY
4HESE STORES CAN BE CLEARED IN BLOCK  "LOCK  IS THEN CONFIRMS THE ERASURE )F ERASURE IS NOT REQUIRED
CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç OR DIRECTLY PRESS KEY . OR SIMPLY PAGE ON
BY KEYING IN THE CODE $!     % 7ITH THE EXCEP

    "EGINNING OF BLOCK 2ESET


2 % 3 % 4

    2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE ,%$ MEMORIES SHOULD BE RESET


, % $ 

    2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE #" OPERATION COUNTERS SHOULD


# / 5 . 4 % 2 3  BE SET TO ZERO

    2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION BUFFER


/ 0 % 2 ! 4  ! . . 5 . #   STORE SHOULD BE ERASED

    2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE FAULT ANNUNCIATION BUFFER STORE


& ! 5 , 4 ! . . 5 . #   SHOULD BE ERASED

$URING ERASURE OF THE STORES THE DISPLAY SHOWS 4!3+ ). 02/'2%33 !FTER ERASURE THE RELAY ACKNOWLEDGES
ERASURE EG

    2 % 3 % 4
% 8 % # 5 4 % $

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 /FF/N CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE

$URING OPERATION OF THE DEVICE IT MAY BE DESIRED TO ! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /&& WHEN THE OFF COMMAND
CONTROL THE RELAY MANUALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRITERIA IS GIVEN BY %)4(%2 THE BINARY INPUT /2 FROM THE OP
TEMPORARILY TO SWITCH OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY ERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HUS IT IS EN
OR TO SWITCH THEM ON ONLY UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS SURED THAT A PARTIAL FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE SWITCHED ON
%XAMPLES MAY BE THE SWITCHING ON OR OFF OF THE FROM THAT PLACE WHERE IT WAS PREVIOUSLY SWITCHED OFF
AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM WHEN A TRANSFER BUS IS BEING
USED DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER A TRANSFORMER OR LINE #ONTROL INPUTS WHICH ARE NOT MARSHALLED TO A BINARY
BRANCH IS SWITCHED TO THE TRANSFER INPUT ARE REGARDED FROM THAT LOCATION AS SWITCHED
ON SO THAT CHANGE OF THE CONDITION IS POSSIBLE FROM
4HE RELAY ALLOWS PARTIAL FUNCTIONS TO BE SWITCHED ON THE OPERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE
OR OFF VIA BINARY INPUTS OR MANUAL OPERATION VIA THE
INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTER !T THE OPERATOR PANEL AND THE OPERATING INTERFACE THE
FACE AT THE FRONT USING A PERSONAL COMPUTER FACTORY SETTING IS EQUALLY THAT ALL PARTIAL FUNCTIONS ARE
SWITCHED ON SO THAT SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IS
&OR SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS OF COURSE NECES POSSIBLE
SARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MARSHALLED TO
THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS &URTHER 4HE COMPLETION OF A SWITCHING COMMAND IS INDE
MORE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT A BINARY INPUT IS REQUIRED PENDENT OF ITS CAUSE OUTPUT AS AN OPERATIONAL AN
FOR EACH FUNCTION SWITCHING OFF AND SWITCHING ON NUNCIATION
4HE SWITCHING COMMAND IS STORED IN THE RELAY AND
PROTECTED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE FUNC FUNCTION OFF #OMES AT THE INSTANT OF
TION OF A BI STABLE STORE  4HE COMMAND CAN BE AN SWITCH OFF
NUNCIATED VIA AN ANNUNCIATION RELAY OR ,%$ DISPLAY
FUNCTION OFF 'OES AT THE INSTANT THAT IT IS
&OR SWITCHING VIA THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR SWITCHED ON
THE FRONT INTERFACE A CODE WORD IS NECESSARY 4HE
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ARE FOUND AT THE BEGINNING OF THE 4HESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE LISTED IN BLOCK  UNDER
PARAMETER BLOCK OF EACH PROTECTION OR SUPPLEMENTA /0%2!4)/.!, !..5.#)!4)/.3 AND CAN ALSO BE
RY FUNCTION 4HE SWITCH CONDITION SHOWN IN THE DIS TRANSMITTED VIA THE ,3! INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL COM
PLAY CAN BE CHANGED OVER USING THE .O KEY . PUTER !LSO THEY CAN BE MARSHALLED AS BINARY OUT
4HE OPPOSITE SWITCH CONDITION THEN APPEARS IN THE PUTS THE SIGNAL RELAY THEN INDICATES THE SWITCHED
DISPLAY %ACH CHANGE OF CONDITION MUST BE CON OFF CONDITION
FIRMED WITH THE % KEY 4HE CHANGE OVER IS FIRST RE
CORDED IN THE RELAY WHEN CODEWORD OPERATION HAS &OR ANNUNCIATIONS ONE MUST DIFFERENTIATE
BEEN TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY THE KEY COMBINA
TION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED $IRECT CONFIRMATION OF A BINARY INPUT IS AVAILABLE AS
BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION LONG AS THE CORRESPONDING BINARY INPUT IS ENER
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3  #ONFIRM WITH THE GIZED )T CAN BE OUTPUT VIA A SIGNAL RELAY OR ,%$ )N
9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME THE SUMMARY OF ALL ANNUNCIATIONS !PPENDIX #
VALID NOW 4HE SWITCHED CONDITIONS ARE THEN PERMA THESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE IDENTIFIED WITH A  SYM
NENTLY STORED IN %%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST BOL
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7
3%44).'3 3!6%$  )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN 4HE COMPLETION INDICATION OF THE SWITCHED OFF
STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL CONDITION IS SIGNALIZED INDEPENDENTLY OF THE
TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST SOURCE OF THE COMMAND )T APPEARS  #OMES AT
CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS THE INSTANT OF SWITCH OFF AND DISAPPEARS  'OES
CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE AT THE INSTANT OF SWITCHING ON

! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /. WHEN THE ON COMMAND 4HE FOLLOWING SURVEY SHOWS THE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
HAS BEEN GIVEN BY BOTH THE BINARY INPUT !.$ ALSO AND ALSO INDICATES WHICH CONFIRMATION INDICATIONS
FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR INTERFACE ARE GENERATED

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

"INARY INPUT #OMPLETION INDICATION


CONFIRMATION  COMES AND GOES

    & ! 5 , 4 2 % #  &AULT RECORDING FUNCTION


/ .
 &LT2EC ON
/ & &  &LT2EC OFF  &LT2EC OFF

    ! 2 & 5 . # 4 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION


/ .
 !2 ON
/ & &  !2 OFF  !2 OFF

    3 9 . # # ( % # + 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION


/ .  3YNC#HCK ON

/ & &  3YNC#HCK OFF  3YNC OFF

 7ARNING
)F SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF
EACH MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT
WITHOUT SYNCHRONISM CHECK

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS ADDRESS BLOCK 

5P TO  DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED 4HE CORRESPONDING PROCEDURE IS USED FOR THE OTHER
FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES PARAMETER SETS
ABOVE  AND BELOW  4HESE PARAMETER SETS
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING C +EY COMBINATION & 
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING
BINARY INPUTS C +EY COMBINATION & 
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "
4HE FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS HAS BEEN SET C +EY COMBINATION & 
DURING PARAMETERIZING 3ECTION  PROVIDED ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #
THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS USED
C +EY COMBINATION & 
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $

4HE RELAY OPERATES ALWAYS WITH THE ACTIVE PARAMETER


 2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET EVEN DURING READ OUT OF THE PARAMETERS OF ANY
SET DESIRED PARAMETER SET 4HE CHANGE OVER PROCE
DURE DESCRIBED HERE IS THEREFORE ONLY VALID FOR
)N ORDER TO LOOK UP THE SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET IN READ OUT OF PARAMETERS IN THE DISPLAY
THE DISPLAY IT IS SUFFICIENT TO GO TO ANY ADDRESS OF THE
FUNCTION PARAMETERS IE ADDRESSES ABOVE  AND
BELOW  EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESSING USING KEY
$! ENTERING THE FOUR FIGURE ADDRESS CODE AND TER  #HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
MINATING WITH ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL
DISPLAY WITH Å OR Ç 9OU CAN SWITCH OVER TO LOOK UP A
DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET EG &OR CHANGE OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET IE IF
A DIFFERENT SET SHALL BE ACTIVATED THE ADDRESS BLOCK
 IS TO BE USED &OR THIS CODEWORD ENTRY IS RE
0RESS KEY COMBINATION &  IE FIRST THE FUNCTION
QUIRED
KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY  !LL DISPLAYED
PARAMETERS NOW REFER TO PARAMETER SET "
4HE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING PARAMETER SETS IS REACHED
BY PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY
4HE PARAMETER SET IS INDICATED IN THE DISPLAY BY A THE ADDRESS     AND ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING
LEADING CHARACTER ! TO $ BEFORE THE ADDRESS NUM THROUGH THE DISPLAY WITH Å OR Ç 4HE HEADING OF THE
BER INDICATING THE PARAMETER SET IDENTIFICATION BLOCK WILL APPEAR

    0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER 


# ( ! . ' % / 6 % 2 PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS

)T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS !S WITH EVERY SETTINGS OF THE DEVICE FOR WHICH CODE
ES USING THE ! KEY OR TO SCROLL BACKWARDS WITH " WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY CODEWORD OPERATION MUST
BE TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY USING THE KEY COMBI
!DDRESS  SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER NATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOL
SET WITH WHICH THE RELAY OPERATES LOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE
QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3  #ONFIRM WITH
)N ORDER TO SWITCH OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME
SCROLL ON WITH ! TO ADDRESS  5SING THE VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . INSTEAD
.O KEY . YOU CAN CHANGE TO ANY DESIRED PARAM CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL ALTER
ETER SET ALTERNATIVELY YOU CAN DECIDE THAT THE PA ATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
RAMETER SETS ARE TO BE SWITCHED OVER FROM BINARY IN CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
PUTS )F THE DESIRED SET OR POSSIBILITY APPEARS IN THE CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
DISPLAY PRESS THE ENTER KEY %

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

    ! # 4 ) 6 0 ! 2 ! - !DDRESS  SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER SET


3 % 4 !

    ! # 4 ) 6 ! 4 ) / . 5SE THE .O KEY . TO PAGE THROUGH THE ALTERNATIVE


POSSIBILITIES 4HE DESIRED POSSIBILITY IS SELECTED BY
3 % 4 ! PRESSING THE ENTER KEY %

3 % 4 "

3 % 4 #

3 % 4 $
)F YOU SELECT 3%4 "9 ").).054 THEN THE PARAMETER
3 % 4 " 9 " ) .  ) . 0 5 4 SET CAN BE CHANGED OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS SEE 3EC
TION  

 #HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER


"INARY INPUT CAUSES
SET VIA BINARY INPUTS
0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAM3ELEC ACTIVE SET
)F CHANGE OVER OF PARAMETER SETS IS INTENDED TO BE NO NO 3ET !
CARRIED OUT VIA BINARY INPUTS THE FOLLOWING IS TO BE
YES NO 3ET "
HEEDED
NO YES 3ET #
,OCALLY IE FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR FROM 0# VIA YES YES 3ET $
THE OPERATING INTERFACE !#4)6!4)/. MUST BE
SWITCHED TO 3%4 "9 ").).054 REFER TO 3ECTION NO  INPUT NOT ENERGIZED
  YES  INPUT ENERGIZED

 LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROL OF 4ABLE  0ARAMETER SELECTION VIA BINARY INPUT
THE  PARAMETER SETS 4HESE BINARY INPUTS ARE
DESIGNATED 0ARAM3ELEC AND 0ARAM
3ELEC  3ELECTOR SWITCH FOR
PARAM SET
4HE LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS MUST BE ALLOCATED TO  !
PHYSICAL INPUT MODULES REFER TO 3ECTION  IN "
ORDER TO ALLOW CONTROL !N INPUT IS TREATED AS NOT , ,
#
ENERGIZED WHEN IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY PHYSICAL
$ "INARY INPUT
INPUT
0ARAM3ELEC
4HE CONTROL INPUT SIGNALS MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY
PRESENT AS LONG AS THE SELECTED PARAMETER SET !
SHALL BE ACTIVE "
, #
,
4HE ACTIVE PARAMETER SETS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE LOGICAL $
BINARY INPUTS AS SHOWN IN 4ABLE  "INARY INPUT
0ARAM3ELEC
! SIMPLIFIED CONNECTION EXAMPLE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE
 /F COURSE THE BINARY INPUTS MUST BE DECLARED IN &IGURE  #ONNECTION SCHEME FOR PARAMETER
NORMALLY OPEN  ./ MODE CHANGE OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

 'ENERAL

0REREQUISITE FOR COMMISSIONING IS THE COMPLETION OF UES ARE CONNECTED AND THAT THE CLOSING LEADS TO THE
THE PREPARATION PROCEDURES DETAILED IN #HAPTER  CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING COILS HAVE BEEN INTERRUPTED

)T IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE ACTUAL SETTINGS FOR THE


 7ARNING RELAY BE USED FOR THE TESTING PROCEDURE )F THESE VAL
UES ARE NOT YET AVAILABLE TEST THE RELAY WITH THE FAC
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS TORY SETTINGS )N THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DURING OPERATION SEQUENCE THE PRESET SETTINGS ARE ASSUMED UNLESS
.ON OBSERVANCE OF THE SAFETY RULES CAN OTHERWISE NOTED
RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPER
TY DAMAGE &OR THE FUNCTIONAL TEST A SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE
SOURCE SUFFICIENT
/NLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHALL WORK ON
AND AROUND THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER BECOM
./4% 4HE ACCURACY WHICH CAN BE ACHIEVED DURING
ING THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL WARNINGS
AND SAFETY NOTICES OF THIS MANUAL AS WELL TESTING DEPENDS ON THE ACCURACY OF THE TESTING
AS WITH THE APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS EQUIPMENT 4HE ACCURACY VALUES SPECIFIED IN THE
4ECHNICAL DATA CAN ONLY BE REPRODUCED UNDER THE
0ARTICULAR ATTENTION MUST BE DRAWN TO THE REFERENCE CONDITIONS SET DOWN IN )%#  RESP 6$%
FOLLOWING PART  AND WITH THE USE OF PRECISION MEASUR
ING INSTRUMENTS 4HE TESTS ARE THEREFORE TO BE LOOKED
! 4HE EARTHING SCREW OF THE DEVICE UPON PURELY AS FUNCTIONAL TESTS
MUST BE CONNECTED SOLIDLY TO THE
PROTECTIVE EARTH CONDUCTOR BEFORE $URING ALL THE TESTS IT IS IMPORTANT TO ENSURE THAT THE
ANY OTHER CONNECTION IS MADE CORRECT COMMAND TRIP CONTACTS CLOSE THAT THE
! (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT PROPER INDICATIONS APPEAR AT THE ,%$S AND THE OUT
ON ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CON PUT RELAYS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING )F THE RELAY IS CON
NECTED TO THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR TO THE NECTED TO A CENTRAL MEMORY DEVICE VIA THE SERIAL IN
MEASURING AND TEST QUANTITIES TERFACE CORRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE RELAY
! (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT AND THE MASTER STATION MUST BE CHECKED
IN THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNEC
TION OF THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE STORAGE !FTER TESTS WHICH CAUSE ,%$ INDICATIONS TO APPEAR
CAPACITORS  THESE SHOULD BE RESET AT LEAST ONCE BY EACH OF THE
! 4HE LIMIT VALUES GIVEN IN THE 4ECHNI POSSIBLE METHODS THE RESET BUTTON ON THE FRONT PLATE
CAL DATA 3ECTION  MUST NOT BE EX AND VIA THE REMOTE RESET RELAY SEE CONNECTION DIA
CEEDED AT ALL NOT EVEN DURING TESTING
GRAMS !PPENDIX !  )F THE RESET FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN
AND COMMISSIONING
TESTED RESETTING THE STORED INDICATIONS IS NO MORE
NECESSARY AS THEY ARE ERASED AUTOMATICALLY WITH
7HEN TESTING THE UNIT WITH A SECONDARY INJECTION TEST EACH NEW PICK UP OF THE RELAY AND REPLACED BY THE
SET IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT NO OTHER MEASURED VAL NEW ANNUNCIATIONS

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 4ESTING THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNC  4ESTING THE SYNCHRONISM AND
TION VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

4HE !2 FUNCTION CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO SINGLE 4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION CAN
POLE THREE POLE OR SINGLETHREE POLE !2 ADDRESS IF FITTED OPERATE WITH THE INTEGRATED AUTO RE
 PROVIDED IT IS CONFIGURED AS ).4%2.!, !2  CLOSE FUNCTION OR WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE
%8)34 !DDRESS  REFER TO 3ECTION  AND DEVICE !DDITIONALLY SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE
SWITCHED TO !2 &5.#4  /. !DDRESS   CHECK CAN BE PERFORMED BEFORE MANUAL CLOSING OF
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ! 0RE REQUISITE IS THAT IT IS CONFI
)F THE FEEDER PROTECTION PROVIDES AN !2 STAGE THE GURED AS 39.#(#(%#+  %8)34 !DDRESS 
PROPER CONTROL OF THIS STAGE SHOULD BE CHECKED REFER TO 3ECTION  AND SWITCHED TO 39.#(%#+
 /. !DDRESS  
4HE BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER READY MUST BE SIM
ULATED UNLESS AN OPEN CIRCUIT CONTACT HAS BEEN PRO 4HE START TO MEASURE SIGNAL CAN BE GIVEN TO THE
GRAMMED FOR THIS PURPOSE &.O  #" READY RE RELAY VIA THE BINARY INPUT 3YNC 3TART &.O
FER ALSO TO 3ECTION     4HE DEVICE CHECKS FOR CLOSE PERMISSION ACCORD
ING TO THE CHECK PROGRAM WHICH IS SET UNDER THE AD
$EPENDING OF THE SELECTED !2 PROGRAM ADDRESS DRESSES  TO  )F THE CHECK RESULT IS POSITIVE
 2!2 02/' A SINGLE PHASE ANDOR TWO CLOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED !NNUNCIATION
PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE SIMULATED WITHIN THE IN 3YNC2ELEASE &.O  
STANTANEOUS STAGE OF THE FEEDER PROTECTION AND WITH
IN THE !2 STAGE IF AVAILABLE BUT BEYOND THE IN 4HE PROGRAMS AVAILABLE ARE
STANTANEOUS STAGE EACH TIME ONCE WITH SUCCESSFUL
AND ONCE WITH UNSUCCESSFUL !2 #HECK THE PROPER 39.#(2  9%3 )F MEASURED VOLTAGES ARE IN
REACTION OF THE RELAY ACCORDING TO THE SET !2 PRO PHASE CLOSE COMMAND IS RE
GRAM LEASED IF IN COUNTER PHASE NO
RELEASE OCCURS
.OTE THAT EACH NEW TEST CAN BEGIN ONLY AFTER THE RE
CLAIM TIME OR LOCK OUT TIME FOR THE PREVIOUS TEST HAS 55  9%3 )F THE FEEDER VOLTAGE 5 IS PRES
EXPIRED OTHERWISE AN AUTO RECLOSE CANNOT RESULT ENT BUT THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5
,%$ !2 NOT READY &.O  ,%$  AS DELIV SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COMMAND IS
ERED MUST NOT BE ILLUMINATED RELEASED

)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT READY A RECLOSE ATTEMPT 55  9%3 )F THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 IS
MUST NOT RESULT (OWEVER A NORMAL !2 CYCLE MUST PRESENT BUT THE FEEDER VOLTAGE
OCCUR WHEN THE SIGNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER READY FIRST 5 SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COM
DISAPPEARS AFTER THE INCEPTION OF THE FAULT MAND IS RELEASED

)F MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED TEST THE FUNC 55  9%3 )F THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 AND
TION SEQUENCE IN ACCORDANCE TO THE SET $!2 PRO THE FEEDER VOLTAGE 5 ARE BOTH
GRAM AND THE NUMBER OF DESIRED SHOTS SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COMMAND IS
RELEASED

/6%22)$%  9%3 #LOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED IN


DEPENDENT ON WHETHER VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT OR NOT NOR WHAT IS
THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 #OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS

!LL SECONDARY TESTING SETS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE  #HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY
REMOVED 2ECONNECT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORM FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
ERS &OR TESTING WITH PRIMARY VALUES THE LINE MUST BE
ENERGIZED
4HIS CHECK SHOULD VERIFY THE CORRECT POLARITY OF THE
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE SYNCHRO
NISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION 4HE PROTECTIVE
MCBS OF BOTH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY CIR
 7ARNING CUITS MUST BE CLOSED

0RIMARY TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED ONLY BY /PEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER


QUALIFIED PERSONNEL WHICH IS TRAINED IN
COMMISSIONING OF PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND !T FIRST SET THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION TO THE OVER
FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATION OF THE PROTECTED RIDE PROGRAM IE ADDRESS  /6%22)$%  9%3
OBJECT AS WELL AS THE RULES AND REGULATIONS 3TART SYNCHRONISM CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY
SWITCHING EARTHING ETC
START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O  3YNC
3TART  4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE
THE RELEASE COMMAND ANNUNCIATION 3YNC2E
LEASE &.O   )F NOT CHECK ALL RELEVANT PARAME
TERS ADDRESS  3ECTION  AND ADDRESS 
3ECTION  

 -EASURED VOLTAGE CHECKS .EXT OPEN THE LINE ISOLATOR AND CLOSE THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER AS TO &IGURE  4HUS BOTH VOLTAGE TRANS
#ONNECTIONS TO THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE FORMER SETS RECEIVE THE SAME VOLTAGE
CHECKED WITH PRIMARY VALUES /PEN THE LINE ISOLATOR
AND CLOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AS TO &IGURE  4HUS
BOTH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SETS RECEIVE THE SAME VOLT
AGE #LOSE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY
MCBS OF BUS BAR AND FEEDER VOLTAGE

4HE VOLTAGES CAN BE READ OFF ON THE DISPLAY IN THE 5


FRONT OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN BLOCK  AND
COMPARED WITH THE ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES 4HE
SECONDARY VOLTAGES ADDRESSES  AND 
MUST BE EQUAL 4HE VALUES FOR —5 ADDRESS  —F
5
ADDRESS  AND —„ ADDRESS  MUST BE AL
MOST ZERO ! DEVIATION OF THE LAST INDICATED DIGIT CAN
BE TOLERATED

)F HIGHER DEVIATIONS ARE RECOGNIZED OR EVEN A LARGE


PHASE ANGLE IS INDICATED CHECK AT FIRST THE SETTING OF
ADDRESS  AND CORRECT IF NECESSARY &URTHERMORE
AN ERROR CAN BE PRESENT IN THE SECONDARY WIRING OF ,INE
THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS #HECK AND CORRECT
THE CONNECTIONS 2EPEAT MEASUREMENT &IGURE  -EASURED VOLTAGES FOR SYNCHRONISM
CHECK
2EAD OUT THE PRIMARY VOLTAGE VALUES ADDRESSES
 AND  AND COMPARE WITH THE ACTUAL VALUES
4HESE VALUES ARE RELEVANT ONLY FOR OPERATIONAL MEA
SUREMENT )F DEVIATIONS OCCUR ADDRESSES  AND 3ET THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION TO
 SHOULD BE CHECKED REFER TO 3ECTION   THE SYNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM IE ADDRESS 

# ' # 


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

39.#(2  9%3 AND  /6%22)$%  ./ 3TART 3WITCH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB OF THE FEEDER VOLT
SYNCHRONISM CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY START AGE TO TRIPPED POSITION 3TART BY ENERGIZING THE
TO MEASURE INPUT &.O  3YNC 3TART  4HE BINARY START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O  3YNC
SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE 3TART  .O RELEASE COMMAND OCCURS #LOSE VOLT
COMMAND ANNUNCIATION 3YNC2ELEASE &.O AGE TRANSFORMER MCB OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE
  )F NOT CHECK AGAIN THE CONNECTIONS )F MEA
SUREMENT IS CARRIED OUT OVER A TRANSFORMER CHECK 2E CHECK AND RE ADJUST ADDRESSES  TO 
ADDRESS  TOO THIS PARAMETER MATCHES THE CON IN CASE THEY WERE ALTERED FOR THESE TESTS 
NECTION GROUP OF THE TRANSFORMER )F THE PARAMETERS
ARE CORRECT CHECK AND CORRECT THE POLARITY OF THE VOLT
AGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS
 -EASURING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION TO THE DEAD
BUS CHECK PROGRAM IE ADDRESS  55 
CLOSING TIME
9%3 AND  39.#(2  ./ 3WITCH VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER MCB OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TO TRIPPED PO )F ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS TO BE ALLOWED THE CIRCUIT
SITION 3TART BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY START TO MEA BREAKER CLOSING TIME IS MEASURED AND SET CORRECTLY
SURE INPUT &.O  3YNC 3TART  .O RELEASE IN ADDRESS  SEE ALSO 3ECTION   ! SUITABLE
COMMAND OCCURS #LOSE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB ARRANGEMENT IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 
OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE
4HE TIME METER IS SET TO THE  S RANGE AND TO A RESOLU
/PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK TION OF  MS #LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MANUALLY THE
FUNCTION TO THE DEAD LINE CHECK PROGRAM IE AD TIME METER IS STARTED AT THE SAME TIME 4HE VOLTAGE
DRESS  55  9%3 AND  55  5 APPEARS WHEN THE POLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
./ 3TART BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY START TO MEA ARE CLOSED THE TIME METER IS THEN STOPPED 4HE TIME
SURE INPUT &.O  3YNC 3TART  4HE SYN INDICATED ON THE METER IS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
CHRO CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE COM TIME
MAND ANNUNCIATION 3YNC2ELEASE &.O   )F
NOT CHECK AGAIN CAREFULLY ALL CONNECTIONS AND PA 4HE EXPERIMENT MUST BE REPEATED IF THE TIME METER
RAMETERS RELATING TO THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE DOES NOT STOP BECAUSE OF AN UNFAVOURABLE CLOSING
CHECK FUNCTION ACCORDING TO 3ECTION  INSTANT

"US BAR

5

3TART

4IME
METER
Õ 5

3TOP

&EEDER

&IGURE  -EASURING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME

 # ' #


6+ 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION

!LL SETTING VALUES SHOULD BE CHECKED AGAIN IN CASE FRONT SO THAT FROM THEN ON ONLY REAL FAULTS ARE INDI
THEY WERE ALTERED DURING THE TESTS 0ARTICULARLY CHECK CATED &ROM THAT MOMENT THE MEASURED VALUES OF
THAT ALL DESIRED FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN PROGRAMMED IN THE QUIESCENT STATE ARE DISPLAYED $URING PUSHING
THE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCK  RE THE 2%3%4 BUTTON THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT WILL LIGHT
FER TO 3ECTION  AND ALL DESIRED FUNCTIONS HAVE UP EXCEPT THE "LOCKED ,%$  THUS A ,%$ TEST IS
BEEN SWITCHED /. PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME

4HE COUNTERS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS #HECK THAT THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSERTED 4HE
SHOULD BE ERASED ADDRESS BLOCK  REFER TO 3ECTION GREEN ,%$ MUST BE ON ON THE FRONT THE RED ,%$ MUST
  NOT BE ON

0USH THE KEY -3 ON THE FRONT 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS #LOSE HOUSING COVER
THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS 4HUS IT IS
POSSIBLE THAT THE MEASURED VALUES FOR THE QUIESCENT !LL TERMINAL SCREWS EVEN THOSE NOT IN USE MUST
STATE OF THE RELAY CAN BE DISPLAYED SEE BELOW  BE TIGHTENED
4HESE VALUES HAS BEEN CHOSEN DURING CONFIGURATION
REFER TO 3ECTION  UNDER THE ADDRESSES  )F A TEST SWITCH IS AVAILABLE THEN THIS MUST BE IN THE
AND  OPERATING POSITION

3TORED INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT PLATE SHOULD BE RESET 4HE AUTO RECLOSE RELAY IS NOW READY FOR OPERATION
BY PRESSING THE PUSH BUTTON 2%3%4 ,%$ ON THE

# ' # 


6+ 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

3IEMENS DIGITAL PROTECTION AND AUTOMATION RELAYS  2OUTINE CHECKS


ARE DESIGNED TO REQUIRE NO SPECIAL MAINTENANCE !LL
MEASUREMENT AND SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS ARE FUL
LY SOLID STATE AND THEREFORE COMPLETELY MAINTENANCE 2OUTINE CHECKS OF INTERNAL FUNCTIONS OR PICK UP VAL
FREE )NPUT MODULES ARE EVEN STATIC RELAYS ARE HER UES ARE NOT NECESSARY AS THEY FORM PART OF THE CON
METICALLY SEALED OR PROVIDED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERS TINUOUSLY SUPERVISED FIRMWARE PROGRAMS 4HE
PLANNED MAINTENANCE INTERVALS FOR CHECKING AND
)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH A BACK UP BATTERY FOR MAINTENANCE OF THE PLANT CAN BE USED TO PERFORM OP
SAVING OF STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE INTERNAL TIME ERATIONAL TESTING OF THE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 4HIS
CLOCK THE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AFTER AT MOST MAINTENANCE SERVES MAINLY FOR CHECKING THE INTER
 YEARS OF OPERATION REFER TO 3ECTION   4HIS REC FACES OF THE UNIT IE THE COUPLING WITH THE PLANT 4HE
OMMENDATION IS VALID INDEPENDENT ON WHETHER THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED
BATTERY HAS BEEN DISCHARGED BY OCCASIONAL SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FAILURES OR NOT 2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL VALUES ADDRESS BLOCK
 AND COMPARISON WITH THE ACTUAL VALUES FOR
!S THE DEVICE IS ALMOST COMPLETELY SELF MONITORED CHECKING THE ANALOG INTERFACES
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE FAULTS ARE AUTOMATICALLY AN
NUNCIATED 4HIS ENSURES THE HIGH AVAILABILITY OF THE
RELAY AND ALLOWS A MORE CORRECTIVE RATHER THAN PRE
VENTIVE MAINTENANCE STRATEGY 4ESTS AT SHORT INTER  7ARNING
VALS BECOME THEREFORE SUPERFLUOUS (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT ON
ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED
7ITH DETECTED HARDWARE FAULTS THE RELAY BLOCKS ITSELF WITH THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR WITH THE MEAS
DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS EQUIPMENT URING AND TEST QUANTITIES
FAULT 
#IRCUIT BREAKER CLOSE CIRCUITS CAN BE TESTED DUR
2ECOGNIZED SOFTWARE FAULTS CAUSE THE PROCESSOR TO ING TESTS OF THE MAIN PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 2E
RESET AND RESTART )F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY SPECTIVE NOTES ARE GIVEN IN THE APPROPRIATE MANU
RESTARTING FURTHER RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS ALS OF THE MAIN PROTECTION RELAYS
STILL PRESENT AFTER THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROCES
SOR SYSTEM WILL SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDI
CATE THIS CONDITION BY THE RED ,%$ "LOCKED ON THE
FRONT PLATE $ROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS
EQUIPMENT FAULT 

4HE REACTION TO DEFECTS AND INDICATIONS GIVEN BY THE


RELAY CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY AND IN CHRONOLOGICAL SE
QUENCE READ OFF AS OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS UNDER
THE ADDRESS  FOR DEFECT DIAGNOSIS REFER TO 3EC
TION  

)F THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A LOCAL SUBSTATION AUTO


MATION SYSTEM ,3! DEFECT INDICATIONS WILL ALSO BE
TRANSFERRED VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE TO THE CENTRAL CON
TROL SYSTEM

 7ARNING
%NSURE THAT THE CONNECTION MODULES ARE NOT
DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING OR INSERTING THE
DEVICE MODULES

 # ' #


6+ 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

 2EPLACING THE CLOCK MODULE

)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH THE CLOCK OPTION MOD ,OOSEN THE DRAW OUT MODULE USING THE PULLING
EL 6+J JJJJ JJ REFER TO 3ECTION  /RDER AIDS PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE  
ING DATA THE DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED IN
.6 2!-S 4HE CLOCK MODULE CONTAINS ALSO THE
BACK UP BATTERY SO THAT THE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE RE  #AUTION
TAINED EVEN WITH A LONGER FAILURE OF THE DC SUPPLY %LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
VOLTAGE NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
4HE CLOCK MODULE SHOULD BE REPLACED AT THE LATEST AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
AFTER  YEARS OF OPERATION VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
FACE
2ECOMMENDED CLOCK MODULE
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC
$!,,!3 TIVE SURFACE
$3   +
2!-IFIED 4)-%+%%0%2 'ET ACCESS TO THE BASIC PCB %03  

4HE MODULE IS LOCATED ON THE BASIC PCB %03   0ULL OUT USED CLOCK MODULE FROM THE SOCKET AC
4HE COMPLETE DRAW OUT MODULE MUST BE REMOVED CORDING TO &IGURE  DO NOT PLACE ON THE CON
FROM THE HOUSING IN ORDER TO REPLACE THE CLOCK MOD DUCTIVE SURFACE
ULE
)NSERT THE PREPARED NEW CLOCK MODULE INTO THE
4HE PROCEDURE WHEN REPLACING THE BATTERY IS DE SOCKET OBSERVE CORRECT MOUNTING POSITION
SCRIBED BELOW
2EMOUNT 0#" BOARD TO THE DRAW OUT MODULE
0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE
FOR THE BASIC MODULE )NSERT DRAW OUT MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE
THAT THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE RIGHT
/PEN HOUSING COVER BEFORE THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN

2EAD OUT DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS IE ALL ADDRESSES &IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
WHICH COMMENCE WITH   ONWARDS  4HIS IS VER &IGURE  
CARRIED OUT MOST CONVENIENT USING THE FRONT OPER
ATING INTERFACE AND A PERSONAL COMPUTER WITH THE
$)'3)q PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM THE
 7ARNING
INFORMATION IS THUS STORED IN THE 0#
4HE DISCHARGED BATTERY CONTAINS ,ITHI
.OTE !LL CONFIGURATION DATA AND SETTINGS OF THE DE UM )T MUST ONLY BE DISPOSED OFF IN LINE
VICE ARE STORED IN %%02/-S PROTECTED AGAINST WITH THE APPLICABLE REGULATIONS
SWITCHING OFF OF THE POWER SUPPLY 4HEY ARE STORED
$O NOT REVERSE POLARITIES $O NOT RE
INDEPENDENT OF THE CLOCK MODULE 4HEY ARE THERE
CHARGE $O NOT THROW INTO FIRE $ANGER
FORE NEITHER LOST WHEN THE CLOCK MODULE IS RE OF EXPLOSION
PLACED NOR WHEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATED WITHOUT A
CLOCK MODULE
0ROVIDED THE INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK IS NOT AUTOMAT
ICALLY SYNCHRONIZED VIA THE ,3! INTERFACE IT CAN
7ARNING NOW BE SET OR SYNCHRONIZED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
 TION 
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN
THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF #LOSE HOUSING COVER
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA 4HE REPLACEMENT OF THE CLOCK MODULE HAS THUS BEEN
PACITORS  COMPLETED

# ' # 


6+ 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

#LOCK MODULE
ON MULTI PIN SOCKET

&IGURE  0OSITION OF THE CLOCK MODULE

 &AULT TRACING

)F THE DEVICE INDICATES A DEFECT THE FOLLOWING PROCE (AS THE MINI FUSE IN THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION
DURE IS SUGGESTED BLOWN SEE &IGURE   )F APPROPRIATE REPLACE THE
FUSE ACCORDING TO 3ECTION 
)F NONE OF THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE MODULE IS
ON THEN CHECK )F THE RED FAULT INDICATOR "LOCKED ON THE FRONT IS ON
AND THE GREEN READY ,%$ REMAINS DARK THE DEVICE
(AS THE MODULE BEEN PROPERLY PUSHED IN AND HAS RECOGNIZED AN INTERNAL FAULT 2E INITIALIZATION OF
LOCKED THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM COULD BE TRIED BY SWITCHING
THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM OFF AND ON AGAIN BY MEANS OF
)S THE /./&& SWITCH ON THE FRONT PLATE IN THE /. THE SWITCH IN THE FRONT PLATE 4HIS HOWEVER RESULTS IN
POSITION ‡  LOSS OF ANNUNCIATIONS AND MESSAGES IF THE RELAY IS
NOT EQUIPPED WITH THE CLOCK MODULE AND IF A PARA
)S THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AVAILABLE WITH THE CORRECT METERIZING PROCESS HAS NOT YET BEEN COMPLETED THE
POLARITY AND OF ADEQUATE MAGNITUDE CONNECTED
LAST PARAMETERS ARE NOT STORED
TO THE CORRECT TERMINALS 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P
PENDIX ! 

 # ' #


6+ 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

 2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE

3ELECT A REPLACEMENT FUSE  }  MM %NSURE 0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC
THAT THE RATED VALUE TIME LAG MEDIUM SLOW AND TIVE SURFACE
CODE LETTERS ARE CORRECT &IGURE  
2EMOVE BLOWN FUSE FROM THE HOLDER &IGURE  
0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE
FOR THE BASIC MODULE &IT NEW FUSE INTO THE HOLDER &IGURE  

/PEN HOUSING COVER )NSERT BASIC MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT
THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE RIGHT BE
 FORE THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN &IGURE  
7ARNING
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN &IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF VER &IGURE  
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA #LOSE HOUSING COVER
PACITORS 
3WITCH ON THE DEVICE AGAIN )F A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS IS STILL SIGNALLED A FAULT OR SHORT CIRCUIT IS PRESENT IN
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE   THE INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 4HE DEVICE SHOULD BE RE
TURNED TO THE FACTORY SEE #HAPTER  
 #AUTION
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
FACE

-INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY


MEDIUM SLOW -

AT 5(.6 RATED
VALUE

  !%
   !%
  !'

2EAR VIEW ON THE


REMOVED MODULE

&IGURE  -INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY

# ' # 


6+ 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

2EMOVING THE BASIC MODULE

,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE


PULLING AIDS PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND
BOTTOM
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO
CONDUCTIVE SURFACE

)NSERTING THE BASIC MODULE

0USH RELEASING LEVER FULLY TO THE RIGHT


)NSERT MODULE
&IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE
RELEASING LEVER

6IEW FROM ABOVE ONTO A  SIZE


MODULE WITH RELEASING LEVER

&IGURE  !ID FOR REMOVING AND INSERTING BASIC MODULE

 # ' #


6+ 6 2EPAIRS 3TORAGE

 2EPAIRS  3TORAGE

2EPAIR OF DEFECTIVE MODULES IS NOT RECOMMENDED AT 3OLID STATE PROTECTIVE RELAYS SHALL BE STORED IN DRY
ALL BECAUSE SPECIALLY SELECTED ELECTRONIC COMPO AND CLEAN ROOMS 4HE LIMIT TEMPERATURE RANGE FOR
NENTS ARE USED WHICH MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCOR STORAGE OF THE RELAYS OR ASSOCIATED SPARE PARTS IS
DANCE WITH THE PROCEDURES REQUIRED FOR %LECTROSTATI  ^# TO  ^# REFER TO 3ECTION  UNDER THE
CALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS %%#  &URTHER 4ECHNICAL DATA CORRESPONDING TO  ^& TO  ^&
MORE SPECIAL MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES ARE NECES
SARY FOR ANY WORK ON THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS IN OR 4HE RELATIVE HUMIDITY MUST BE WITHIN LIMITS SUCH THAT
DER TO DO NOT DAMAGE THE BATH SOLDERED MULTILAYER NEITHER CONDENSATION NOR ICE FORMS
BOARDS THE SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND THE PROTEC
TIVE FINISH )T IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE STORAGE TEMPERA
TURE TO THE RANGE  # TO  #  & TO  & 
4HEREFORE IF A DEFECT CANNOT BE CORRECTED BY OPERA THIS PREVENTS FROM EARLY AGEING OF THE ELECTROLYTIC CA
TOR PROCEDURES SUCH AS DESCRIBED IN #HAPTER  IT IS PACITORS WHICH ARE CONTAINED IN THE POWER SUPPLY
RECOMMENDED THAT THE COMPLETE RELAY SHOULD BE RE
TURNED TO THE MANUFACTURER 5SE THE ORIGINAL TRANS &OR VERY LONG STORAGE PERIODS IT IS RECOMMENDED
PORT PACKAGING FOR RETURN )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS THAT THE RELAY SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE AUXILIARY
USED THIS MUST PROVIDE THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION VOLTAGE SOURCE FOR ONE OR TWO DAYS EVERY OTHER YEAR
AGAINST MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%# IN ORDER TO REGENERATE THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
   CLASS  AND )%#    CLASS  4HE SAME IS VALID BEFORE THE RELAY IS FINALLY INSTALLED
)N EXTREME CLIMATIC CONDITIONS TROPICS PRE WARM
)F IT IS UNAVOIDABLE TO REPLACE INDIVIDUAL MODULES IT IS ING WOULD THUS BE ACHIEVED AND CONDENSATION
IMPERATIVE THAT THE STANDARDS RELATED TO THE HANDLING AVOIDED
OF %LECTROSTATICALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS ARE
OBSERVED "EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
LEAST TWO HOURS IN ORDER TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE
 7ARNING EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN THE
DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE SUP
PLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE MODULE
FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CAPACITORS 

 #AUTION
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPONENT
CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE CON
NECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SURFACE
4HIS APPLIES EQUALLY FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF
REMOVABLE COMPONENTS SUCH AS %02/-
OR %%02/- CHIPS &OR TRANSPORT AND RE
TURNING OF INDIVIDUAL MODULES ELECTROSTATIC
PROTECTIVE PACKING MATERIAL MUST BE USED

#OMPONENTS AND MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED AS


LONG AS THEY ARE INSTALLED WITHIN THE RELAY

3HOULD IT BECOME NECESSARY TO EXCHANGE ANY DE


VICE OR MODULE THE COMPLETE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT
SHOULD BE REPEATED 2ESPECTIVE NOTES ARE CONTAINED
IN #HAPTER  AND 

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

!PPENDIX

! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

" #ONNECTION DIAGRAMS

# 4ABLES

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

                       
                       

$
,
. %
5
6
! ) &
4 3
- !
3 
2 
- . %
%
O 
.
# 5
/ 
/
) .
0
#
D
N
G 2
' / N
#  $
T
B
3
9 .

T
/
)
5 A U %
 O
. U
3
) ! ) R 3
%
#
3
M K
-
D
!
LA - , . IE . ) 2 C
-
 )
3
) - R . K 6 !
M ¼
R FT 4
N
A E
2
%
%  9 5
C  %
4 % 
O
K D
2
U
! -
3 0 2 T
I $ 2
O
L
.
9
 8 $ H S R !
, L¤ %
, M /
5 0  E
R !
2
B
$ E % 
IC
U E
T ! T
I -
% M
O
#
! ) E %
!

N
B
% IT E
!
)0
N  E )

2 + % S 2 3
) B 2  Y
+ A
G .
E
R
R
G
S
2
U
 "

Z
R
!
,
E 4 T # E
3 4 FT
D I E L LD R
/ N
I / G % ! H  / E
R
/
B O
F
G
I
4
E
# E #
LI , IC / U T , : R LT , + P %
$ % ,
O
,
N . L¤ IN "
& T
E ¼ ! - 3 2
.
# P / % 2 ¤
R D .
#
% 2 % % ! % % 2
!
% 2 IN
0
2 2 5 E N ) 3 /
7! 7 7 ! + 2 ' 7 % & , , 7!
7 ! %  %
-   $


















 
- + + , - - - - - - - - -
/ %
+ -
                               
  
# # ## # ## # $ $$ $$ $ $$ $ $$$ ### # ## ## # ###
    $ $$
%                               
3 %
! 3
# !
' #
.
) '

4 ).
. 4 3
5 . 0
/ 5 %
- /
% -
# (
! 3
& 5
2 ,
5 &
3 
 E  %
S  6
E  :
S U : 3
U ¤ ! 3 !
¤ H % 0 %
H E %
E ' %
'
U
U A
A B
N
FB I
U %
!

                     
! ! ! ! $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ ! ! ! ! $ $
                     

4 9
,
% 0
3 0
% + 5
4 2
%
# 3
5 $ 3 /
, 2
0 %
,
/
,
" %

). % 

  9 #
2
7
/
 4  ,  
,
 
,
$
!
,
! 0
/ , , , !  
% -
4
O $ O $ O $
% 5
G
2 2 G
" %
!
D
N
.
!
D
N
. D
N
. 
. N N
!
! 2

4 A
-
A
!
A
! "

U
R
U
3 - - - G
' T
 M M M #  IE R
E - - - K O

).
S G M / M M C S
E O O / O / IT ). R
N # # # E LO E
% 2 U +
0
+ + R %
" V
G ) 0 0 E D
E ) ) M
R 3 2 3 3 B N
$ 2 2 O
N 4 A % R
% 5 5 4 5 4 3 T
, ! ! ! ! , ( 7 3 (
       
        5
% % % % % % % %
 
5 5
, , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

                  
              


G .
N /
)
U 4
RK
I #
.
7 5
E &
N
H /
O .

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITHOUT SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

       
       

#
%
  2
. . 4
,
5 5
  5
2 2
T T    !
F F &
9 U
%
U
% . . .
! ¤
L
-
) ¤
L
-
)
 5  5  5 '
, FT 2 FT 2 FT 2
IT 4 IT 4
U U U
.
)
% E
Z
E
Z L¤




 6
,
2 N
$
!
N
$
! 
%

%

%
/
 E
S %
E
S % T
I -
) T
I -
) T
I
-
) 6
U U E 4 E 4 E 4 %
3
) A
$
A
$
Z Z Z 
0 % 0 % N N N R
! , , E $ E $ E $ E
L
, 5
/
5
/
S
U
!
%
S
U
!
%
S
U
!
% H
% +
0
 +
0

A
$
A
$
A
$
E
F
0 0 0
2 
L
2

L
2 2 2 2
E
G
% O
P !
O
P ! 5 ! 5 ! 5
!
L
O
$  2  2 , $ , $ , $ &
,      
% 











- - - - - - -

           
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
           
%
3 %
! 3
# !
#
' 
. '
) . :
4 ) !
. 4 %
5 .
5
/
/
-
-
%
# (
! 3
& 5
2 ,
&
5 
3
 E
S
E U
S ¤
U H
¤ E
H '
E
'
U
A
U B
A
IN
FB %
U
!
           
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
           

4 
+ + +
N # #
5 E #
/ /
R
0 E
I
/
, , ,
"
). K " "  % %

C 2 2 N , ,
 O
L $
! ! E /
N
E /
B . & R R
$ 0 0
% O
!
2
  .
& IE  IE 
" D - N N /
/ K
C +
K
C +
! N
A
- E
R
E
R 2
2 LO #
LO
#
!
' M
/ IE IE !

B / B /
# K K  L ,
L
,
). M
%
C C
LO IN
S
U
O "
O
"
O LO P
% + 3
B B
E A 
2
!
P

2
!
/ % %
, 5 5 5 2 5 2
IN # + , 7 7 + +
%    
 
      
      
% % % % % % %


, , , , , , , , ,

        
   

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITHOUT SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

!
-
3

&

%
#
! % !
# &
- ! 2
 3 & %
2 4
 & %  ).
4
# #
 .
)  #
)
4
#
) 0
4 /
0
%
/ 2
% "
)
L 2 L &
U )" U
(
D &  D
O # O )4
 - (   -
3 4 7
) 3
0 0 %
% 7 3
, % ,
%  !
7 3 7
, # , #
TI ! 
# IT '
M
'
M ).
E E 4
S .
) S .
U 4 U
¤ ¤ 5
H . # H /
5 "
E
E -

' / '
-  % 
 # 
U (  U ! 
A 3  A & 
B 5 + B 2 +
N F
 I , 6  U 5 6
% &  # ! 3 

 !
#-

3

&

!
-
3

&

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITHOUT SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

                       
                       

$
. % ,
! 6
)
5
&
- 4
!
3

3
- 9 2 % O 

% .
/ .
! 0
# D
N G 5
#  /
) , '
. /
# A N 2
T
  $
B
3 % .
 /
) %
5
3
M
U
K %
. 3 ) T
O U ) 2 R 3 M C
3
) D
! A
L -  . E
I .
#
) 2 O ¼
R
 -
)
N - R
2
. K %
6 ! K
- FT 4
! A -
E
% 3

9 5 C

4 %  S
D
R 2 U
, M / 3 0 ) IT
$ 2 LO
.
9

8 $ H U E
T
!
, L¤ %
E
% M #
5 ! R ! 2 B E %  C
I
! N !
T
I
! )0 , E  $ B IT E S U E )-
2 O
% B
% !
N + A % E R E
0
) 

Z !
+ S 2
% T
2  Y IG . R
LG IG 2 "
 R ,
/ 3 E 4
2 H 4
T
F D
# E
LT 4
LD R
E
IN / IG  E / B O E # #
$ % , L %
, %
C
I / U
¤
T
N
/
,
R
& : T
F
R ¼ , - +
P %
O N L I E G 3
. #
P / $
. " 2 ¤
R D
!
#
2
% % % % . %
! % 2 N
I 0
, 2 2 5 ! E N ) 3 / 2
7 ! 7 7 ! + 2 ' 7 % & , , 7 !
7 !
- % 
%         
 
-   -         
+ + - - - - - - - - -
/
+
                                  
# # # # # # # # $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ # # # # # # # # # # # #
                                  

%
3
! %
# 3
!
' #
). ' 
4 3
. 0
. )
5 4 %
/ .
5
-
/
% -
#
! (
& 3
2 5
5 ,  %
3 &   6
  : 3 : 3
E E ! 0 !
S S % % %
U U
¤ ¤
H H
E E
' '

U U
A A
B B
F
U IN
! %

                
    
! $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ ! ! $ $
! ! !         ! !  
          


4
% 9
,
3 0
% +
0
2 #
% 5
3 / 3
$ ,
% / " 2
, ,
4 % #
%
 2 7
5 4
 
 
9 ,
! /
0 /
, , 
,

,

,

,
$ !
5
 0
4 !
).
- G 
2 O $ O O % .
% $ $ N
D . G
 2 !
4 N !
D
N
. D
N .
2

! U
R N
 A ! ! - U
% T 3 -
A A "  IE
 M -  K G
E M M - R
" S G M
-
M - M -
#
).
C O

! E
2
N O /
O / O / T
I
% LO S
R
U + # " E
' G 0
+ # + # E
R
D V
) N
.
) $ E
R 3 2 3
)0
3 )0
E
B
A % M
% N 5 2 2 ( O
% , ! !
4 5
!
4 5
! 4 3 
7 R
T
 ,  3 (
   
   
    % %
% %  5
% % %
%
 
5 5 , , , , , , , , , , , ,
, ,

                  
              

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITH SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

       
       

9
!
,
%  

2 
. .
T
R N
.
 FT
5  5
E FE
/
)
2 FT 2
U % U )3
3
)
U
%
U % E 6 LA
L¤ L¤
T ) 6  '
S E
! T
I -
) T
I
-
) E
2
G
2 T
R .
)
, E
Z
4 E 4 G $ B
%
0
E
I
+
.
Z 2 
% N N
H
C %
AB
E 5
K
C
#
FT
.
$ /
2 E
S
$
!
E
S !
R
U 6 U 3
LO , U 5
% U % U % D / 4 4

B " L¤ 2

A A      
$ 0 $
0
$
# # # # # # # #
, 2 2
. . . . . . . .
% 5 !
5
!
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
+ 2 , $ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
-
     
     
     
- - - - - -

           
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
           

%
3 %
! 3
# !
# 
'
. ' :
) !
4 ). %
. 4
5 .
/ 5
- /
% -
# (
! 3
& 5
2 ,
5 &
3 
 E
E S
S U
U ¤
¤ H
H E
E '
'
U
U A
A B
FB IN
U %
!

        
  
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! !   !
         


#
  .

+ + + 5 5 9
4 N
E # # # " " 3
5 R
E
/
,
/
,
/ # # +
I
0 K " "
,
"
- - #

).
C 4 4 /
$ 2 , 
LO !
2 6 6
 B .
2
! 



"

N
R 
! $ N E #
% O
D -
  5
T
5
T
E
R
U
.
N E
" N - E
N
E
A A E
I
T
S
9
A R
! /
IE
R M M K
C
H
3
M E
I O O C %
' M
# K
C
K
T
U
T
U LO
R
$
U )
).
% C B
O
3 LO LO
! !
 D 2
+ 
% /
,
B B L L C
N
C 2
%
5 D D N
IN # +
5 Y
Y 6
% , 7 7 3
3 /
     
 
     
     
% % % % % % %


, ,
, , , , , , ,

        
   

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITH SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

!
-
3

&

%
! % #
!
 - # &
3 !
& 2
 %
# & 2 4
% 

4 # ).

). #
)
# 4
) 0
4
0 /
/ %
% 2
2 "
)
L &
U "
) 
L
U
 D & # D (
3
O
(
  O )4
0 - 4 3
) 0 - 7
% %
7 %
,  3
% # , !
7 3  7 #
, ! ,
TI # TI '
M ' M ).
E E 4
S ).
U 4 S .
¤ . U 5
H # ¤ /
E 5
H "
/ E -

' ' %
- 
 # 
U (  U ! 
A 3  A & 
B 5 +  B 
 N
I F 2 +
, 6 # U 5
% &   6
 ! ! 3 
# -
 3

&

!
-
3

&

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 6+ WITH SYNCHRONISM CHECK SHEET  OF 

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

" #ONNECTION DIAGRAM

3URFACE MOUNTING
, , , &LUSH MOUNTINGCUBICLE INSTALLATION
 6 &EEDER VOLTAGE TRANSF $ 
9Y 3IGNAL RELAY  $ 
5 , 5 ,  ! $ 
5 ,  ! $ 
5 , 3IGNAL RELAY  $ 
$
5 ,  ! $ 
3IGNAL RELAY  $ 
5 ,  ! $
 $ $ 
"INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  $ 
 $ INPUT  $
 $ $ 
"INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  $

,
5 5

,  $ INPUT  $
 $ # 
"US BAR "INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  #
VOLTAGE TRANSF $ INPUT  #
 6  $ # 
9Y $ "INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  # 
INPUT  # !LL SIGNAL RALAYS
 $ #  CAN BE MARSHALLED
 $ "INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  # 
, INPUT 
 $ #
, "INARY # 
$ INPUT  3IGNAL RELAY  # 
,  ! # 
! "INARY ! 
INPUT 
 ! 3IGNAL RELAY  !
 ! "INARY ! 
!LL BINARY INPUTS INPUT  3IGNAL RELAY  !
CAN BE MARSHALLED  !
"INARY ! 
! INPUT  3IGNAL RELAY  ! 
 ! ! 
! "INARY 3IGNAL RELAY  !
INPUT  ! 
 ! 3IGNAL RELAY  !
 ! "INARY
INPUT  ! 
 ! 3IGNAL RELAY  ! 
! "INARY
INPUT 
 !
"INARY 6+
INPUT 
 ! # 
"INARY #OMMAND #
INPUT  RELAY 
 ! #
"INARY #  !LL COMMAND RELAYS
 ! INPUT  #  CAN BE MARSHALLED
#OMMAND # 
 $ , RELAY  # 
0OWER SUPPLY  $ # 
,
# &IBRE OPTIC INTERFACE #


&IGURE " #ONNECTION DIAGRAM EXAMPLE 6+

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

# 4ABLES

4ABLE # 4ABLE OF ALL BINARY INPUTS                                                           

4ABLE # 4ABLE OF ALL BINARY OUTPUTS                                                          

4ABLE # 2EFERENCE TABLE FOR CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS                                         

4ABLE # 2EFERENCE TABLE FOR FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS                                            

4ABLE # /PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES                                                        

./4% 4HE FOLLOWING TABLES LIST ALL DATA WHICH ARE AVAILABLE IN THE MAXIMUM COMPLEMENT OF THE DEVICE $EPEN
DENT ON THE ORDERED MODEL ONLY THOSE DATA MAY BE PRESENT WHICH ARE VALID FOR THE INDIVIDUAL VERSION

./4% 4HE ACTUAL TABLES ARE ATTACHED TO THE PURCHASED RELAY

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

Table of All Binary Inputs 7VK512


µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
R - Function can be marshalled to binary input (BI)

¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬§
› FNo › Abbreviation › Meaning › BI ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 1 › not allocated › no input fuction allocated › R ›
› › › › ›
› 5 › >Time Synchro › synchronize internal real time clock › R ›
› 6 › >LED reset › reset LED indicators › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 7 › >Start FltRec › start Fault Recording › R ›
› › › › ›
› 11 › >Manual Close › manual close of circuit breaker › R ›
› › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 14 › >U1 VT MCB › VT m.c.b. line side tripped › R ›
› 15 › >U2 VT MCB › VT m.c.b. bus-bar side tripped › R ›
› 16 › >CB Aux. L1 › circuit breaker aux. contact phase L1 › R ›
› 17 › >CB Aux. L2 › circuit breaker aux. contact phase L2 › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 18 › >CB Aux. L3 › circuit breaker aux. contact phase L3 › R ›
› 19 › >CB Aux. 3p C › CB aux. contact all poles closed › R ›
› 20 › >CB Aux. 1p C › CB aux. contact any pole closed › R ›
› › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 21 › >Annunc. 1 › user defined annunciation 1 › R ›
› 22 › >Annunc. 2 › user defined annunciation 2 › R ›
› 23 › >Annunc. 3 › user defined annunciation 3 › R ›
› 24 › >Annunc. 4 › user defined annunciation 4 › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› › › › ›
› 30 › >Sync. Start › unitate synchro-check from external › R ›
› 31 › >Sync. Block › block Synchro-check from external › R ›
› 32 › >Sync. synch › synchro-check prog: check synchronism › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 33 › >Sync. U1>U2< › synchro-check prog: live line dead bus › R ›
› 34 › >Sync. U1<U2> › synchro-check prog: dead bus live line › R ›
› 35 › >Sync. U1<U2< › synchro-check prog: dead line dead bus › R ›
› 36 › >Sync. o/ride › synchro-check prog: override (bypass) › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› › › › ›
› › › › ›
› 49 › >Flt.Rec. on › switch on fault Recording function › R ›
› 50 › >Flt.Rec. off › switch off fault Recording function › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 51 › >SyncChck on › switch on synchro-check function › R ›
› 52 › >SyncChck off › switch off synchro-check function › R ›
› 57 › >AR on › switch on auto-reclose function › R ›
› 58 › >AR off › switch off auto-reclose function › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› › › › ›
› 59 › >ParamSelec.1 › parameter set selection 1 (with No.60) › R ›
› 60 › >ParamSelec.2 › parameter set selection 2 (with No.59) › R ›
› › › › ›
¨¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬Á

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬§
› FNo › Abbreviation › Meaning › BI ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 80 › >Start AR › external start internal auto-reclose › R ›
› 81 › >Trip L1 AR › trip L1 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›
› 82 › >Trip L2 AR › trip L2 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›
› 83 › >Trip L3 AR › trip L3 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› › › › ›
› 86 › >1p RAR Block › block 1pole rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›
› 88 › >3p RAR Block › block 3p rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›
› 89 › >RAR Block › block rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 90 › >AR Block › block all auto-reclose from external › R ›
› 91 › >DAR Block › block delayed auto-reclose (DAR) › R ›
› › › › ›
› 92 › >CB Ready › circuit breaker ready for reclosing › R ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 93 › >DAR aft. RAR › delayed auto-reclose only after RAR › R ›
› 94 › >Sync.Release › synchronism from ext. synchro-check › R ›
› 95 › >CloseCmd.Blo › block all close commands from externa › R ›
› › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬œ
› 96 › >Trip 1p AR › 1pole trip for auto-reclose initiate › R ›
› 97 › >Trip 3p AR › 3pole trip for auto-reclose initiate › R ›
› 98 › >AR Reset › reset auto-reclose lockout › R ›
› › › › ›
¨¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬Á

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

Table of All Binary Outputs 7VK512


µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
Rel,LED - to output relay or LED R - Annunc. marshallable
OP, PC - to operator panel or PC K - Annunciated "Coming"
LSA - to localized substation autom. K/G - "Coming" and "Going"
¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬§
› › › ›Rel›OP › ›
› FNo›Abbreviation › Meaning ›LED› PC›LSA›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 1›not allocated›no annunciation function allocated › R › › ›
› › › › › › ›
› 5›>Time Synchro›synchronize internal real time clock › R › › ›
› 6›>LED reset ›reset stored LED indicators › R › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 7›>Start FltRec›start fault recording › R › › ›
› › › › › › ›
› 11›>Manual Close›manual close of circuit breaker › R ›K/G› ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 14›>U1 VT MCB ›VT secondary m.c.b. line side tripped › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 15›>U2 VT MCB ›VT second. m.c.b. bus-bar side tripped› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 16›>CB Aux. L1 ›circuit breaker aux. contact phase L1 › R ›K/G› ›
› 17›>CB Aux. L2 ›circuit breaker aux. contact phase L2 › R ›K/G› ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 18›>CB Aux. L3 ›circuit breaker aux. contact phase L3 › R ›K/G› ›
› 19›>CB Aux. 3p C›CB aux. contact: all poles closed › R ›K/G› ›
› 20›>CB Aux. 1p C›CB aux. contact: any pole closed › R ›K/G› ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 21›>Annunc. 1 ›user defined annunciation 1 › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 22›>Annunc. 2 ›user defined annunciation 2 › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 23›>Annunc. 3 ›user defined annunciation 3 › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 24›>Annunc. 4 ›user defined annunciation 4 › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› 30›>Sync. Start ›initate synchro-check from external › R ›K/G›K ›
› 31›>Sync. Block ›block Synchro-check from external › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 32›>Sync. synch ›synchro-check prog: check synchronism › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 33›>Sync. U1>U2<›synchro-check prog: live line dead bus› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 34›>Sync. U1<U2>›synchro-check prog: dead line live bus› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 35›>Sync. U1<U2<›synchro-check prog: dead line dead bus› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 36›>Sync. o/ride›synchro-check prog: override (bypass) › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› › › › › › ›
› 49›>Flt.Rec. on ›switch on fault recording function › R › › ›
› 50›>Flt.Rec. off›switch off fault recording function › R › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 51›>SyncChck on ›switch on synchro-check function › R › › ›
› 52›>SyncChck off›switch off synchro-check function › R › › ›
› 57›>AR on ›switch on auto-reclose function › R › › ›
› 58›>AR off ›switch off auto-reclose function › R › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› 59›>ParamSelec.1›parameter set selection 1 (with No.60)› R › › ›
› 60›>ParamSelec.2›parameter set selection 2 (with No.59)› R › › ›
› › › › › › ›
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬§
› › › ›Rel›OP › ›
› FNo›Abbreviation › Meaning ›LED› PC›LSA›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 80›>Start AR ›external start internal auto-reclose › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 81›>Trip L1 AR ›trip L1 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 82›>Trip L2 AR ›trip L2 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 83›>Trip L3 AR ›trip L3 for auto-reclose initiate › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› 86›>1p RAR Block›block 1pole rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 88›>3p RAR Block›block 3p rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 89›>RAR Block ›block rapid auto-reclose (RAR) › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 90›>AR Block ›block all auto-reclose from external › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 91›>DAR Block ›block delayed auto-reclose (DAR) › R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
› 92›>CB Ready ›circuit breaker ready for reclosing › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 93›>DAR aft. RAR›delayed auto-reclose only after RAR › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 94›>Sync.Release›synchronism from ext. synchro-check › R › ›K/G›
› 95›>CloseCmd.Blo›block all close commands from externa › R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 96›>Trip 1p AR ›1pole trip for auto-reclose initiate › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 97›>Trip 3p AR ›3pole trip for auto-reclose initiate › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 98›>AR Reset ›reset auto-reclose lockout › R ›K/G› ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 101›Dev.Operative›device operative / healthy › R › ›K/G›
› 102›Re-start ›re-start of processor system › ›K ›K ›
› 103›Syst.Flt ›fault in the power system › ›K ›K/G›
› 104›Fault ›fault event › ›K › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 106›LED reset ›LED's Reset › R ›K ›K ›
› 107›Flt.Rec.Activ›fault record available or transmiited › R › › ›
› 108›Flt.Rec. off ›fault recording function switched off › R ›K/G› ›
› 109›Rel.TimeResp.›relative time response to LSA › › ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 110›Param.Running›parameters are being set › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 111›Manual Close ›circuit breaker manually closed(pulse)› R ›K ›K ›
› 112›Man.Close Cmd›manual close command to CB › R ›K/G›K ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 116›Param. Set A ›parameter set A is active › R ›K/G›K ›
› 117›Param. Set B ›parameter set B is active › R ›K/G›K ›
› 118›Param. Set C ›parameter set C is active › R ›K/G›K ›
› 119›Param. Set D ›parameter set D is active › R ›K/G›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› › › › › › ›
› 121›Failure 18V ›failure of internal 18VDC power supply› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 122›Failure 15V ›failure of internal 15VDC power supply› R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 123›Failure 5V ›failure of internal 5VDC power supply › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 124›Failure 0V ›failure of internal 0VDC power supply › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 125›Failure RKA ›command relay supervision alarm › R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬§
› › › ›Rel›OP › ›
› FNo›Abbreviation › Meaning ›LED› PC›LSA›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 131›Annunc. Lost ›annunciations lost (buffer overfow) › ›K › ›
› 132›Flt.Bff.Ovr ›fault annunciation buffer overflow › ›K › ›
› 134›Annu.LSA Lost›annunciations for LSA lost › ›K ›K ›
› 135› › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 136›Oper.Ann.Inva›operational annunciations invalid › ›K › ›
› 137›Flt.Ann.Inval›fault annunciations invalid › ›K › ›
› 139›Stat.Buff.Inv›statistic annunciation buffer invalid › ›K/G› ›
› 140›LED Buff.Inva›LED annunciation buffer invalid › ›K/G› ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› 161›Chs Error ›error in check sum › ›K/G› ›
› 162›Chs.1 Error ›error in check sum for parameter set A› ›K/G› ›
› 163›Chs.2 Error ›error in check sum for parameter set B› ›K/G› ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 164›Chs.3 Error ›error in check sum for parameter set C› ›K/G› ›
› 165›Chs.4 Error ›error in check sum for parameter set D› ›K/G› ›
› › › › › › ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 221›Device FltDet›general fault detection › R › › ›
› 251›Device Trip ›general trip › R › › ›
› › › › › › ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 801›AR Off ›auto-reclose is switched off › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 802›AR Blocked ›auto-reclose is blocked/not operative › R ›K/G› ›
› 803›AR not ready ›auto-reclose is not ready › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 804›AR T-CB Exp. ›AR :CB supervision time expired › R ›K ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 805›CB not ready ›AR :circuit breaker not ready › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 806›AR Block.Dyn.›auto-reclose is dynamically blocked › R ›K ›K ›
› 807›AR in prog. ›auto-reclose in progress › R › › ›
› 808›RAR T-Act.run›rapid auto-reclose (RAR) action runn'g› R ›K ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 809›RAR T-1p run.›single-pole dead time is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 810›AR T-Recl.run›reclaim time is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 811›RAR T-3p run.›three-pole RAR dead time running › R ›K ›K ›
› 812›EV.Flt.Recog.›evolving fault recognized › R ›K ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 813›AR Successful›auto-reclose cycle has been successful› R ›K ›K ›
› 814›Definit.Trip ›definitive trip › R ›K ›K ›
› 815›CB Alarm Supp›circuit breaker alarm suppressed › R ›K ›K ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 816›AR Close Cmd.›close command from auto-reclose › R ›K ›K ›
› 817›RAR 1p Close ›close comm. after 1-pole reclose cycle› R › › ›
› 818›RAR 3p Close ›close comm. after 3p RAR reclose cycle› R › › ›
› 819›DAR 3p Close ›close comm. after 3p DAR reclose cycle› R › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› › › › › › ›
› 820›1p Trip Perm.›1-pole tripping allowed › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 821›RAR 1p Prog. ›RAR programmed 1-pole only › R › › ›
› 822›RAR 3p Prog. ›RAR programmed 3-pole only › R › › ›
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬§
› › › ›Rel›OP › ›
› FNo›Abbreviation › Meaning ›LED› PC›LSA›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 823›RAR Zone Rel.›zone extension for rapid reclosing › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 824›DAR Zone Rel.›zone extension for delayed reclosing › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 825›Sync.Meas.St.›start-to-measure signal for sync-check› R ›K ›K ›
› 826›RAR Only ›only rapid auto-reclosing allowed › R › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 827›DAR Only ›only delayed auto-reclosing allowed › R › › ›
› 828›DAR T-ACT.run›DAR action time is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 829›DAR T-3p1 run›DAR 3-pole dead time 1 is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 830›DAR T-3p2 run›DAR 3-pole dead time 2 is running › R ›K ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 831›DAR T-3p3 run›DAR 3-pole dead time 3 is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 832›AR 1p in prog›1-pole auto-reclose initiate › ›K ›K ›
› 833›AR 3p in prog›3-pole auto-reclose initiate › ›K ›K ›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 840›Sync. off ›synchro-check function is switched off› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 841›Sync. running›synchro-check function is running › R ›K ›K ›
› 842›Sync. faulty ›synchro-check function faulty › R ›K ›K ›
› 843›Sync.Tsup.Exp›synchro-check supervision time expired› R ›K ›K ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 844›Sync.Override›synchro-check programmed override › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 845›Sync. Synchro›synchro-check synchronism fulfilled › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 846›Sync. U1>U2< ›syn-check live line dead bus fulfilled› R ›K/G›K/G›
› 847›Sync. U1<U2> ›syn-check dead line live bus fulfilled› R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 848›Sync. U1<U2< ›syn-check dead line dead bus fulfilled› R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
› 849›Sync. Blocked›synchro-check function is blocked › R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 850›Sync. Release›synchronism release (to ext. recloser)› R ›K ›K ›
› 851›Sync.CloseCmd›close command from synchro-check funct› R ›K ›K ›
› › › › › › ›
› 860›Sync.Del. U> ›synchro-check delta U exceeded › R ›K/G›K/G›
«¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬­¬¬¬œ
› 861›Sync.Del. f> ›synchro-check delta f exceeded › R ›K/G›K/G›
› 862›Sync.Del.PHI>›synchro-check delta PHI exceeded › R ›K/G›K/G›
› › › › › › ›
› 900›Dev. Drop-off›general drop-off of the device (reset)› ›K ›K ›
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

Reference Table for Configuration Parameters 7VK512


µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ

6000 MARSHALLING
6200 MARSHALLING SIGNAL RELAYS
6100 MARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
6201 RELAY 1
6101 INPUT 1 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6202 RELAY 2
6102 INPUT 2 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6203 RELAY 3
6103 INPUT 3 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6204 RELAY 4
6104 INPUT 4 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6205 RELAY 5
6105 INPUT 5 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6206 RELAY 6
6106 INPUT 6 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6207 RELAY 7
6107 INPUT 7 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6208 RELAY 8
6108 INPUT 8 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6209 RELAY 9
6109 INPUT 9 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6210 RELAY 10
6110 INPUT 10 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6211 RELAY 11
6111 INPUT 11 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6212 RELAY 12
6112 INPUT 12 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6213 RELAY 13
6113 INPUT 13 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6214 RELAY 14
6114 INPUT 14 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ 6215 RELAY 15
6115 INPUT 15 ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6300 MARSHALLING LED INDICATORS
6301 LED 1
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6302 LED 2
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6303 LED 3
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6304 LED 4
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6305 LED 5
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6306 LED 6
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

6400 MARSHALLING TRIP RELAYS 7800 SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS


6401 TRIP REL. 1 7828 FAULT RECRD
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6402 TRIP REL. 2 7834 INTERNAL AR
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7835 SYNCH.CHECK
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6900 LSA CONFIGURATION 7869 LSA
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6902 LSA BAUDR. 7885 PARAM.C/O
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7899 FREQUENCY
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7000 OPERATING PARAMETERS
7001 LANGUAGE
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7002 OPER.BAUDR.
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7003 DATE FORMAT
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7004 FAULT INDIC
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7005 OPER. 1st L
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7006 OPER. 2nd L
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7007 FAULT 1st L
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7008 FAULT 2nd L
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7009 DEVIDE ADD.
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7010 FEEDER ADD.
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

Reference Table for Functional Parameters 7VK512


µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ

1000 PARAMETERS
1100 POWERSYSTEM DATA 3400
AUTO- RECLOSE FUNCTION
1103 Un PRIMARY 3401 AR FUNCT
min. 1 kV ON [ ]
max. 1200 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ OFF [ ]
1104 Un SECOND. 3403 MAN.CL.BL.
min. 80 V YES [ ]
max. 125 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ NO [ ]
1132 U1-U2ANGLE 3405 T-RECLAIM
min. -179 à min. 0.50 s
max. 180 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
1133 T CB CLOSE 3406 TBLOCK DYN
min. 0.01 s min. 0.50 s
max. 0.50 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ max. 320.0/Ô ¬¬¬¬¬¬
1135 T CLOSE 3407 TBLOCK M/C
min. 0.01 s min. 0.50 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
3412 CB? 1 TRIP
2800 FAULT RECORDINGS YES [ ]
NO [ ]
2801 FAULT REC.
ON [ ] 3413 CB? CLOSE
OFF [ ] CB? NEVER [ ]
CB? WITH EACH AR [ ]
2802 INITIATION CB? WITH 2nd AR [ ]
BY FAULT DETEC. [ ]
BY TRIP <T-REC [ ] 3415 T-CB-SUPV
min. 0.01 s
2803 FAULT REC. max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
TO PC/PD [ ]
TO LSA [ ] 3419 SYN.CHK.PR
ONLY ARTER DAR [ ]
2804 T-REC AFTER 3POLE AR [ ]
min. 0.01 s AFTER 2nd DAR [ ]
max. 2.50 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ NEVER [ ]
3422 RAR PROGR.
THREE-POLE [ ]
SINGLE-POLE [ ]
SINGLE/THREE-POL [ ]
3424 RAR T-ACT
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.0/Ô ¬¬¬¬¬¬

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

3425 RAR T-3POL 3500


CHECK SYNCHRONISM
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ 3501 SYNC-CHECK
ON [ ]
3426 RAR T-1POL OFF [ ]
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ 3502 U<
min. 1 V
3428 EV.F.RECOG max. 60 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
BY TRIP COMMAND [ ]
BY FAULT DETEC. [ ] 3503 U>
min. 20 V
3429 EV.F.BLOCK max. 125 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
ALWAYS [ ]
NEVER [ ] 3505 DELTA U<
>T-DISCR. [ ] min. 1 V
max. 50 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
3430 T-DISCR.
min. 0.01 s 3506 DELTA f<
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ min. 0.03 Hz
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
3442 DAR PROGR.
NO DAR [ ] 3507 DELTA PHI<
DAR WITHOUT RAR [ ] min. 1 à
DAR AFTER RAR [ ] max. 60 ¬¬¬¬¬¬
3443 DAR No.1PH 3508 DEL.f<SYNC
min. 0 min. 0.03 Hz
max. 9 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ max. 0.10/Ô ¬¬¬¬¬¬
3444 DAR No.3PH 3515 SYNCHR.
min. 0 YES [ ]
max. 9 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ NO [ ]
3445 DAR T-ACT. 3516 U1>U2<
min. 0.01 s NO [ ]
max. 320.0/Ô ¬¬¬¬¬¬ YES [ ]
3446 DAR T3POL1 3517 U1<U2>
min. 0.01 s NO [ ]
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ YES [ ]
3447 DAR T3POL2 3518 U1<U2<
min. 0.01 s NO [ ]
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ YES [ ]
3448 DAR T3POL3 3519 OVERRIDE
min. 0.01 s NO [ ]
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬ YES [ ]
3521 SYN.MAN.CL
ON [ ]
OFF [ ]
3522 M/C-Df<SYN
min. 0.03 Hz
max. 0.10/Ô ¬¬¬¬¬¬

 # ' #


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

3525 M/C-SYNCHR
YES [ ]
NO [ ]
3526 M/C-U1>U2<
NO [ ]
YES [ ]
3527 M/C-U1<U2>
NO [ ]
YES [ ]
3528 M/C-U1<U2<
NO [ ]
YES [ ]
3529 M/C-O/RIDE
NO [ ]
YES [ ]
3530 T-SYN.SUPV
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬¬¬

# ' # 


6+ 6 !PPENDIX

Operational Control Facilities 7VK512


µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ

8000 DEVICE CONTROL 8514 COPY ? SET A -> SET B


8515 COPY ? SET A -> SET C
8100 SETTING REAL TIME CLOCK
8516 COPY ? SET A -> SET D
8101 DATE/TIME
8517 COPY ? SET B -> SET A
8102 DATE
8518 COPY ? SET B -> SET C
8103 TIME
8519 COPY ? SET B -> SET D
8104 DIFF. TIME
8520 COPY ? SET C -> SET A
8200 RESET 8521 COPY ? SET C -> SET B
8201 RESET LED ? 8522 COPY ? SET C -> SET D
8202 RESET COUNTERS ? 8523 COPY ? SET D -> SET A
8203 RESET TOTAL Isc ? 8524 COPY ? SET D -> SET B
8204 RESET OPERAT.ANNUNC. ? 8525 COPY ? SET D -> SET C
8205 RESET FAULT ANNUNC. ?
ON/OFF CONTROL
8500 PARAMETER CHANGE_OVER 2801 FAULT REC. ON
OFF
8501 ACTIV PARAM
3401 AR FUNCT ON
8503 ACTIVATION SET A OFF
SET B
SET C 3501 SYNC-CHECK ON
SET D OFF
Attention! With SYNC-CHECK = OFF no closing checks!
8510 COPY ? ORIG.SET->SET A
3521 SYN.MAN.CL ON
8511 COPY ? ORIG.SET->SET B OFF
Note: When 3501 is switched off, 3521 is off, too!
8512 COPY ? ORIG.SET->SET C
8513 COPY ? ORIG.SET->SET D

 # ' #


6+ 6 #ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS

4O &ROM
????????????????????????????????????????
3)%-%.3 !+4)%.'%3%,,3#(!&4 .AME

$EPT %6 3 350 
????????????????????????????????????????
$  "%2,). #OMPANY$EPT

'ERMANY
????????????????????????????????????????
!DDRESS
$EAR READER

PRINTING ERRORS CAN NEVER BE ENTIRELY ELIMINATED ????????????????????????????????????????


THEREFORE SHOULD YOU COME ACROSS ANY WHEN 4ELEPHONE NO
READING THIS MANUAL KINDLY ENTER THEM IN THIS
FORM TOGETHER WITH ANY COMMENTS OR SUG
GESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT THAT YOU MAY HAVE ????????????????????????????????????????

#ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS

# ' #  


#OPYING OF THIS DOCUMENT AND GIVING IT TO OTHERS AND THE USE
OR COMMUNICATION OF THE CONTENTS THEREOF ARE FORBIDDEN WITH
OUT EXPRESS AUTHORITY /FFENDERS ARE LIABLE TO THE PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES !LL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF
3UBJECT TO TECHNICAL ALTERATION A PATENT OR THE REGISTRATION OF A UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN

3IEMENS !KTIENGESELLSCHAFT /RDER .O # ' # 

!VAILABLE FROM ,:& &¼RTH "ISLOHE

0RINTED IN THE &EDERAL 2EPUBLIC OF 'ERMANY

!'   &/  %N

You might also like